21 JT OM EN USC t 2021 GLADIATOR

21 JT OM EN USC t

KRudish

Owners Manual - Dealer E Process

This Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and ... Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by ...

2021 GLADIATOR

Browser built in viewer
PDF Viewer
Universal Document Viewer
Google Docs View
Google Drive View
Download Document [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 484 Pages, 27.01MB

Document

✖

PDF 2021-gladiator

2021 GLADIATOR OWNER'S MANUAL

This Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner's Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2 3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................110 3 4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 139 4 5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 223 5 6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................301 6 7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................360 7 8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 383 8 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................451
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................463
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................468
11

2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..........................................................10 ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................10 CAMPERS ..............................................................11 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........11 Symbol Glossary ...................................................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................16 Key Fob......................................................... 16
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................19 IGNITION SWITCH .................................................20
Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Ignition..................... 20 REMOTE START -- IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...21
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 22 To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 22 Remote Start Front Defrost Activation -- If Equipped ...................................................... 23 Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped ..................................................... 23 Remote Start Cancel Message ................... 24 REMOTE START -- IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........24 How To Use Remote Start ........................... 24 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED ...25 To Arm The System ..................................... 25 To Disarm The System ................................ 25 Rearming Of The System............................. 26

DOORS .................................................................. 26
Manual Door Locks...................................... 26 Power Door Locks -- If Equipped ............... 27 Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Passive Entry (If Equipped) ..................................................... 27 Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped ......... 29 Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors ............................................................ 29 Front Door Removal .................................... 30 Rear Door Removal ..................................... 33 STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 35
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 35 Heated Steering Wheel -- If Equipped ....... 35 SEATS ................................................................... 36
Manual Adjustment Front Seats................. 36 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat .................. 37 Rear Seat Stadium Position........................ 39 Heated Seats -- If Equipped ...................... 39 Rear Seat Armrest -- If Equipped ............... 40 Head Restraints .......................................... 40 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ...................... 42
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 42 Basic Voice Commands............................... 43 Get Started................................................... 43 Additional Information................................. 43 MIRRORS .............................................................. 44
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 44 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 44 Outside Mirrors ............................................ 44 Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped ..................... 45 Power Mirrors -- If Equipped....................... 45

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) ......................................................45
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®.................................................. 46 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 46 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 46 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener................................................. 47 Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous Device ................................. 48 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........................................................... 48 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 48 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................49
Headlight Switch.......................................... 49 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) -- If Equipped ..................................................... 50 High/Low Beam Switch............................... 50 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped ................................. 50 Flash-To-Pass............................................... 50 Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped ......... 51 Lights-On Reminder..................................... 51 Front Fog Lights -- If Equipped .................. 51 Turn Signals ................................................. 51 Lane Change Assist -- If Equipped ............. 51 Bed Lights -- If Equipped ........................... 51 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................52
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 52 Dimmer Controls.......................................... 52

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............52
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 53 CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................54
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Functions .............................................. 54 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And Functions...................................................... 57 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) -- If Equipped ...................................................... 59 Climate Voice Commands ........................... 60 Operating Tips ............................................. 60 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT..............61
Storage ......................................................... 61 AUX/USB Control.......................................... 64 Jeep® Wireless Speaker -- If Equipped ..... 66 Power Outlets .............................................. 71 Power Inverters -- If Equipped ................... 72 Auxiliary Switches -- If Equipped ................ 73 POWER WINDOWS -- IF EQUIPPED ...................75
Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 76 Manual Sliding Rear Window -- If Equipped ...................................................... 76 Window Lockout Switch .............................. 76 Wind Buffeting ............................................ 77 GLADIATOR TOPS ................................................77
Provided Tools.............................................. 77 Lowering The Soft Top................................. 77 Raising The Soft Top.................................... 84 Removing The Soft Top ............................... 87 Installing The Soft Top................................. 89 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal............... 91

Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation .......... 94 Removing The Hard Top.............................. 94 Installing The Hard Top ............................... 96 DOOR FRAME -- IF EQUIPPED WITH A SOFT TOP ........................................................................ 97 Door Frame Removal .................................. 97 Door Frame Installation .............................. 98 FOLDING WINDSHIELD ...................................... 99 Lowering The Windshield ..........................100 Raising The Windshield.............................102 HOOD ..................................................................102 Opening The Hood .....................................102 Closing The Hood.......................................103 TAILGATE.............................................................103 Opening ......................................................103 Three-Position Tailgate..............................103 Closing ........................................................ 105 BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................105 TONNEAU COVER -- IF EQUIPPED ....................106 Tonneau Cover Installation .......................106 Tonneau Cover Removal ...........................108 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED...........109
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .....................................110 Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............114

3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................... 115 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls ...................................................... 115 Oil Life Reset -- If Equipped...................... 116 Off Road+ Display -- If Equipped ..............116 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items........................................................... 117 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..117 Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode Message, And Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) .................................121 Diesel Displays .......................................... 122 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages ...................................................122 Fuel System Messages ............................. 124
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 126 Red Warning Lights ................................... 126 Yellow Warning Lights ............................... 129 Yellow Indicator Lights .............................. 132 Green Indicator Lights............................... 134 White Indicator Lights ............................... 135 Blue Indicator Lights .................................136
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II .... 136 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity ............................... 137
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ........................................................ 137

4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE -- GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) .................................................... 139
Manual Transmission -- If Equipped .......139 Automatic Transmission -- If Equipped ...139 Normal Starting .........................................140 AutoPark .....................................................140 Extreme Cold Weather (Below 22°F Or -30°C) ......................................................142 If Engine Fails To Start .............................142 After Starting ..............................................143 STARTING THE ENGINE -- DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED).......................................................... 143 Automatic Transmission............................144 Extreme Cold Weather...............................144 Normal Starting..........................................144 Starting Fluids............................................145 NORMAL OPERATION -- DIESEL ENGINE ....... 145 Cold Weather Precautions ........................146 Engine Idling...............................................147 Stopping The Engine..................................147 Cooling System Tips -- Automatic Transmission ..............................................148 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED ....... 149 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS -- GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ................. 149 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS -- DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)........................ 150 PARKING BRAKE ............................................... 150

MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED ......151
Shifting .......................................................152 Downshifting ..............................................153 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF
EQUIPPED ...........................................................154
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................155 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .......................................................156 EightSpeed Automatic Transmission ....156 Gear Ranges ..............................................157 FOURWHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..................161
Four-Position Transfer Case -- If Equipped ....................................................161 Five-Position Transfer Case -- If Equipped ....................................................163 Trac-Lok Rear Axle -- If Equipped ............166 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear -- If Equipped ...................................................166 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only -- If Equipped ...................................................166 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect -- If Equipped ...................................................167 Off Road+ -- If Equipped ...........................168 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ......169
STOP/START SYSTEM -- AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) .......................170
Autostop Mode...........................................170 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop .....................................................171

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ..........................................................171 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........................................................ 172 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........................................................ 172 System Malfunction................................... 172 STOP/START SYSTEM -- MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ....................... 172
Autostop Mode .......................................... 173 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop .....................................................173 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ..........................................................174 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........................................................ 174 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........................................................ 175 System Malfunction................................... 175 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS -- IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 175
Cruise Control -- If Equipped ...................175 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped ....................................................177

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED .................................. 187
ParkSense Sensors ...................................187 ParkSense Warning Display......................188 ParkSense Display.....................................188 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........191 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System ........................................................ 191 Cleaning The ParkSense System..............192 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....192 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 193
TRAILCAM SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED ............... 195
REFUELING THE VEHICLE -- GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)...................................... 196
Fuel Filler Cap ............................................196 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................197 REFUELING THE VEHICLE -- DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ................................................... 197
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel................198 Bulk Fuel Storage -- Diesel Fuel ...............198 Diesel Exhaust Fluid .................................198 VEHICLE LOADING ............................................. 201
Certification Label......................................201 TRAILER TOWING ............................................. 202
Common Towing Definitions .....................202 Trailer Hitch Classification ........................205 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........................................205 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................208 Towing Requirements................................209 Towing Tips.................................................211

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) ....................................................212
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ........................................................212 Recreational Towing -- Four-Wheel Drive Models ........................................................ 213 DRIVING TIPS......................................................215 On-Road Driving Tips .................................215 Off-Road Driving Tips.................................215
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................223 CYBERSECURITY ...............................................223 UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................224
Customer Programmable Features ..........224 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................238
System Overview .......................................238 Drag & Drop Menu Bar..............................240 Safety And General Information ...............240 UCONNECT MODES ............................................241 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................241 Radio Mode ...............................................242 Media Mode ..............................................252 Phone Mode ..............................................255 ANDROID AUTOTM & APPLE CARPLAY® -- IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................267 Android AutoTM ..........................................267 Apple CarPlay® ..........................................270 Android AutoTM And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks...................................................272

5
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES -- IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 272
Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................272 Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services .....................................................272 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle Services .....................................................274 Using SiriusXM GuardianTM ...................... 277 Manage My SiriusXM GuardianTM Account ...................................................... 292 CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 292 Connected Services SOS FAQs ................ 292 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/ Unlock FAQs ..............................................292 Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs ..........................................................293 Connected Services Send & Go FAQs ..... 293 Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ..........................................................293 Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance FAQs .......................................294 Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start FAQs ................................................. 294 Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights FAQs ................................................ 295 Connected Services Account FAQs........... 295 Data Collection & Privacy..........................297 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 297 Regulatory And Safety Information .......... 297

6
OFF-ROAD PAGES -- IF EQUIPPED .................. 298 Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................298 Drivetrain....................................................299 Accessory Gauge........................................299 Pitch & Roll ................................................300
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 301 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................301 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...302
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 309 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) -- If Equipped ...................................................309 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation -- If Equipped............................313 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........................................................316
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 321 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....321 Important Safety Precautions ...................321 Seat Belt Systems .....................................322 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...329 Child Restraints..........................................344
SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 356 Transporting Passengers ..........................356 Transporting Pets.......................................357 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle.................................................357

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle...................................358 Exhaust Gas ...............................................359 Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................359
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................360 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED.....360 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................364
Preparations For Jacking ..........................364 Jack Location ............................................365 Spare Tire Removal ..................................366 Jacking Instructions...................................368 To Stow The Flat Or Spare.........................370 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............372 JUMP STARTING ................................................372 Preparations For Jump Start.....................373 Jump Starting Procedure ..........................374 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................375 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................376 MANUAL PARK RELEASE..................................377 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................378 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................379 FourWheel Drive Models.........................380 Without The Key Fob .................................381 Emergency Tow Hooks -- If Equipped .....381

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................................ 382 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING -- GASOLINE ENGINE ............................................................... 383
Maintenance Plan ..................................... 384 SCHEDULED SERVICING -- DIESEL ENGINE .. 388
Maintenance Plan -- Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Biodiesel...............................................389 Additional Maintenance -- B6 To B20 Biodiesel..................................................... 391 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 392 3.6L Engine ...............................................392 3.0L Diesel Engine .................................... 393 Checking Oil Level ..................................... 394 Adding Washer Fluid .................................394 Maintenance-Free Battery ........................ 394 Pressure Washing......................................395 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................... 395 Engine Oil ...................................................396 Engine Oil Filter.......................................... 396 Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................ 396 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter -- Diesel Engine ........................................................ 398

Fuel Filter Replacement -- Diesel Engine.........................................................399 Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel -- Diesel Engine ................................401 Intervention Regeneration Strategy -- Message Process Flow .............................401 Diesel Exhaust Fluid .................................402 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................402 Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................403 Body Lubrication ........................................405 Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................405 Exhaust System ........................................406 Cooling System ..........................................408 Brake System ............................................411 Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................412 Transfer Case ............................................412 Manual Transmission -- If Equipped ........412 Automatic Transmission -- If Equipped ...412 Fuses .........................................................413 Bulb Replacement ....................................422 TIRES ................................................................... 426
Tire Safety Information..............................426 Tires -- General Information......................432 Tire Types ...................................................436 Spare Tires -- If Equipped ........................437 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................438 Snow Traction Devices .............................440 Tire Rotation Recommendations..............441

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................442
Treadwear ..................................................442 Traction Grades .........................................442 Temperature Grades .................................442 STORING THE VEHICLE......................................443 BODYWORK ........................................................444 Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......444 Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........444 Preserving The Bodywork..........................444 INTERIORS .........................................................447 Carpet Safety Information.........................447 Carpet Removal .........................................448 Seats And Fabric Parts ..............................449 Plastic And Coated Parts...........................450 Leather Surfaces .......................................450 Glass Surfaces ..........................................450
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .......451 BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................451 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ................................................451
Torque Specifications................................451

7
FUEL REQUIREMENTS -- GASOLINE ENGINE................................................................ 452
3.6L Engine................................................ 452 Reformulated Gasoline ............................. 452 Materials Added To Fuel ...........................452 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................453 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...................................................... 453 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .. 453 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline.................. 453 Fuel System Cautions................................454 FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINE ...... 454 Diesel Fuel Specifications.........................455 Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................455 FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 457 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................. 458 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 462
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 463
Prepare For The Appointment .................. 463 Prepare A List.............................................463 Be Reasonable With Requests ................. 463

8
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 463 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................464 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........464 Mexico ........................................................464 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ..........464 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................464 Service Contract ........................................464

WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................465 MOPAR® PARTS ................................................465 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................465
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. .......................................465 In Canada...................................................465

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 466 General Information.......................................... 466

INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer,

Congratulations on the purchase of your Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the Owner's Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don't overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. See Ú page 215 for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All information contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims towards a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.

10
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
CAUTION!
NOTE:
TIP: PAGE REFERENCE ARROW

These statements are against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. These statements are against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. A suggestion which will improve installation, operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage. General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the product or functionality.
Follow this reference for additional information on a particular feature.

If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

FOOTNOTE

Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the topic.

Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
CAMPERS
This vehicle is NOT recommended for slide-in camper applications.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol Ú page 126.

Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light

Ú page 126

Brake Warning Light Ú page 126

Battery Charge Warning Light Ú page 127

Door Open Warning Light Ú page 127
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 127
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Ú page 127

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Ú page 128

Hood Open Warning Light Ú page 128

12
Red Warning Lights Oil Pressure Warning Light Ú page 128
Oil Temperature Warning Light Ú page 128
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Ú page 128
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster Ú page 128
Transmission Temperature Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 129
Vehicle Security Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 129
Yellow Warning Lights Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Ú page 129

Yellow Warning Lights Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light -- If Equipped Ú page 129
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 130
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 130
Low Fuel Warning Light Ú page 130
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 130
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Ú page 130
Service 4WD Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 131

Yellow Warning Lights Service Stop/Start System Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 131
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light Ú page 131
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 131
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Ú page 131
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 132
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 132
4WD Low Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133

13
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Part Time Indicator Light -- If Equipped 1
Ú page 133
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Neutral Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Sway Bar Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133

14
Yellow Indicator Lights
Off Road+ Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Cargo Light On Indicator Light Ú page 133
Wait To Start Light -- If Equipped Ú page 133
Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Ú page 134
Water In Fuel Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 134
Green Indicator Lights Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 134
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light -- If Equipped Ú page 134

Green Indicator Lights
4WD Auto Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 134
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster Ú page 134
Front Fog Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 134
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light Ú page 135
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light Ú page 135
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Ú page 135
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 135

White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster Ú page 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 135
Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 135
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 135
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster Ú page 136
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light -- If Equipped Ú page 136

White Indicator Lights

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster

Ú page 136

Cruise Control SET Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 136

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 136

Selec - Speed Control (SSC) Indicator Light -- If Equipped

Ú page 136

Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light Ú page 136

16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and tailgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also contains a mechanical key.

NOTE:
The key fob's wireless signal may be blocked if the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.

WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with the key fob facing away from your body, especially your eyes and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob may be damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong electrical shocks. In order to ensure complete effectiveness of the electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.

Key Fob

1 -- Mechanical Key Release Button 2 -- LED Indicator 3 -- Lock Button 4 -- Remote Start Button 5 -- Panic Button 6 -- Unlock Button
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door, or twice to unlock all the doors. To lock all the doors, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings Ú page 224.
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the doors, tailgate, glove compartment, storage compartments (if equipped), and rear seatbacks.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the panic button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights 2
will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the panic button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 2 mph (4 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indicated on the vehicle's instrument cluster, and the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a button push.
1. Remove the back cover of the key fob by inserting a flat-blade screw driver into the slot on the bottom of the fob. Apply light pressure until the cover unsnaps being

careful not to damage the seal. Proceed counter-clockwise (in the order shown below) to loosen the remaining snaps until the battery cover can be removed.
1-3 Back Cover Pry Points 2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a
small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot and sliding the battery forward and upward being careful not to damage the electronic board underneath.

Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery until it is seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly aligned before snapping it back in place.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just two hours and can lead to death. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children.
Only use the manufacturer-recommended replacement coin cell battery. Use of an incorrect type of replacement coin cell battery could result in risk of fire or explosion.
Programming And Requesting Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and

operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Ú page 466.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button

ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to

prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.

Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed

to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key

fob obtained from another vehicle.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Ú page 466.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO -- IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a START/STOP ignition button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.

START/STOP Ignition Button
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC 3 -- RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes: OFF The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. automatic locking, alarm, etc.) are available.
ACC Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.

RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key) against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
Do not use the Mechanical Key against the START/STOP ignition button.
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screw driver etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition switch. This button comes as an assembly, and is not removable. This can damage the silicone shield.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

Backup Starting Method
Do Not Use Mechanical Key WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for

thieves. Always remove key fob from the

vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE: When opening the driver's door with the ignition in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message will display "Ignition Or Accessory On" in the cluster.
REMOTE START -- IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 300 ft (91 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and tailgate will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again will shut the engine off.

NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will Remote Start: Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator Light not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start system, either push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/ STOP ignition button.

The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with another push and release of the Remote Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume the previously set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Passive Entry feature, the message "Remote Start Active -- Push Start Button" will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION -- IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once

the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions. See "Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped" in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS -- IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will also turn on if programmed in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 224. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated, if programmed via the comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) -- If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal temperature and mode, dependent upon the outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume their previous settings.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) -- If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the 2
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control settings, see Ú page 54.
NOTE: These features will stay on through the duration of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will change if manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This includes turning the climate controls off using the OFF button.

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely: Remote Start Cancelled -- Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled -- Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled -- Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled -- Tailgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled -- Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position Ú page 466.
REMOTE START -- IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To Start yellow telltale to extinguish before cranking the engine Ú page 126. This allows time for the engine pre-heat cycle to pre-heat the cylinder air, and is normal in cold weather.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event

Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator/Check Engine telltale is not illuminated
Water In Fuel telltale is not illuminated
Wait To Start telltale is not illuminated
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the system is activated, the interior switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security system provides both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF position.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone Ú page 27.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped) Ú page 27.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

NOTE:

The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security system.

When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not

unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle Security system will rearm itself.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.

Manual Door Lock
NOTE: The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the door cylinders, tailgate, glove compartment, and storage compartments (if equipped).
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when you park and exit the vehicle. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in the OFF position and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

POWER DOOR LOCKS -- IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the doors, and rearward to lock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when you park and exit the vehicle. (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

NOTE:

Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through Uconnect Settings Ú page 224.

The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located

next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-

tronic device; these devices may interfere

with the key fob's wireless signal and prevent

the Passive Entry system from locking/

unlocking the vehicle.

Passive Entry Unlock initiates Headlight Illumination On Approach (low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights) for whichever time duration is set within the Uconnect Settings between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps.

If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.

If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security system.

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver's door handle will unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE: Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system Ú page 224.

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are closed, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key

fob inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect system, the key protection described in this section remains active/functional.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch, and then the doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle's Doors
With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle doors.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock NOTE: When pushing the door handle lock button, DO NOT grab the door handle. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, the driver must wait three seconds before locking or unlocking the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow the driver to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect system, the key protection described in "Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted Ú page 466.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS -- IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM -- REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock 2
system. To use the system, open each rear door, temporarily remove the sealing plug for access, and use a flat blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) to rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle, even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel), roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.

NOTE: Always use this device when carrying children. After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left inside.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged (locked).

Door Removal Warning Label
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road operation with doors removed. For information on off-road driving tips, see Ú page 215.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in the event of an accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.

CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). For information on off-road driving tips, see Ú page 215.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the vehicle's parts will occur.
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE: When front doors are removed, the message "Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable" will display in the instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also be unavailable.

To remove the front doors, proceed as follows: 1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage. 2. Remove the hinge pin nut from the upper
and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver). NOTE: The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin located under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31 3. Remove the plastic wiring access door
under the instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are detached.
2
Wiring Access Door NOTE: Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring harness.

NOTE: Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier re-installation.

Closed Wiring Harness
1 -- Locking Tab 2 -- Wiring Harness Lever
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under the wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into the open position.

Open Wiring Harness
1 -- Wiring Harness Lever 2 -- Black Security Tab
6. With the wiring harness open, pull downward on the wiring connector to unplug. Unhook the wire harness strap from the hook on the bodyside door opening. Store the wiring connector in the lower door basket of the door.
7. With the door in the open position, remove the check bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx head driver).

Door Check
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of another person, to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the reverse order.
NOTE: The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling. When reinstalling the door check arm attachment bolt, bolt torque should be between 11.76 ft·lb / 16 N·m and 27.9 ft·lb / 38 N·m.

REAR DOOR REMOVAL
WARNING! Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
Door Removal Warning Label

WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road operation with doors removed. For information on off-road driving tips, see Ú page 215.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in the event of an accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). For information on off-road driving tips, see Ú page 215.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the vehicle's parts will occur.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

Use this QR code to access your digital experience.

To remove the rear doors,

proceed as follows:

1. Roll down the glass window

to prevent any damage.

2. Remove the hinge pin nuts from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).

NOTE: The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin under the rear seat.

Hinge Pin Nut

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward. 4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring
access door from the bottom of the B-pillar.

Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged. Unhook the wire harness strap from the hook on the bodyside door opening. Store the wire connector in the lower basket of the door.

Wiring Connector
6. With the door in the open position, remove the check bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE: Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier reinstallation.

Door Check
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of another person, to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the reverse order.
NOTE: The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling. When reinstalling the check arm attachment bolt, bolt torque should be between 11.76 ft·lb / 16 N·m and 27.9 ft·lb / 38 N·m.

CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). For information on off-road driving tips, see Ú page 215.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the vehicle's parts will occur.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that will warm the steering wheel in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only 2
one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see Ú page 23.

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Adjustment Bar Location
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes may be necessary to achieve the desired position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2

Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seatback Recline Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean forward or rearward, depending on the direction you would like the seatback to move. Release the strap when the desired position is reached and the seatback will lock into place.

Recline Strap
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Lumbar Support The Lumbar Support Control knob is located on the outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

Lumbar Support Control Knob
60/40 SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT
WARNING!
The seatback is not intended to be used for storing cargo when folded flat, and only folds to allow access to the cargo area behind the seat. Do not operate the vehicle with unsecured cargo on the second row folded seatback.
The 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat can be folded flat to access the storage area behind the seat. The seat bottom can also be lifted into the Stadium Position to create more storage space on the rear floor, and provide access to the underseat storage bins (if equipped) Ú page 39.

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
The center head restraints must be in the lowest position to avoid contact with the center console when folding the seat.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

NOTE: Each rear seatback can be locked in an upright position using the vehicle key. Each seatback must be unlocked to release for folding.
Release Strap Location

To raise the seatback to the proper position, manually lift the seatback until it locks into place. To return the head restraint to the proper position, manually lift up until it locks into place. If interference from the cargo area behind the seat prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seats to their proper position.
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with stow clips located on the lower trim, next to the rear seats. Use these clips to hold the seat belt out of the path of the seat back when it is being folded and raised.

Folding The Rear Seats
To fold down the rear seat, pull the release strap located on the upper outboard side of the rear seat to release the seat. The head restraints are folded independently Ú page 40.

Rear Seat Folded Flat

Stow Clip Location

You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply opening the seats to the open position, the seat cushion will return to its normal shape over time.

1. Lift upward on each section of the seat bottom.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. Perform a "push - pull push" check to confirm the seat is fully locked. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. A red indicator on the pull strap will be displayed if the seatback is not securely locked. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

Lift From Beneath Seat (Left Side Shown)
2. Raise the seat bottom upward into the Stadium Position.

REAR SEAT STADIUM POSITION
The rear seat bottoms can be folded upward into the Stadium Position to create more storage space on the vehicle's floor, and to access the under seat storage bins (if equipped).
To fold the seat bottom upward, proceed as follows:

Stadium Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39 To return the seat bottom to the normal position, push downward on the raised seat bottom.
HEATED SEATS -- IF EQUIPPED The heated seat control buttons are located on 2
the center instrument panel below the touchscreen and also in the Climate Control touchscreen menu.
Heated Seat Control Buttons Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on. Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see Ú page 23.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
REAR SEAT ARMREST -- IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest

NOTE: The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. The release button does not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go, then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Front Head Restraint
1 -- Release Button 2 -- Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

Rear Head Restraints

The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an adjustable, removable center head restraint.

To fold down the outboard head restraints, push the button located on the outboard side of the head restraint.

Rear Foldable Outboard Head Restraints

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height using the adjustment button. For information on child seat tether routing, see Ú page 321.
NOTE: Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the center console when folding the seat down.

WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head restraints installed while passengers are occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area without the head restraints installed are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your vehicle's Voice Recognition (VR) system.

Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

Uconnect 4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
"Cancel" to stop a current voice session.

"Help" to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
"Repeat" to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice Recognition system's status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command from the current category.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons 1 -- Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or Receive A Text 2 -- Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, And Climate Functions 3 -- Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. AndroidTM is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 466. For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror -- If Equipped The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver's rear view.

CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the visors and lift the cover.

Manual Mirror Adjustment

Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off through the Uconnect "Controls" button on the touchscreen.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The Outside Mirrors are located on the front driver and passenger side doors, and are adjusted manually or by power adjustment (if equipped).

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the Outside Mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

HEATED MIRRORS -- IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) Ú page 54.
POWER MIRRORS -- IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel next to the door handle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Using the power mirror control switch, push any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/ 2
RUN position to adjust the power mirrors.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®)

Outside Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

Power Mirror Control Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will activate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE: Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the antenna is attached to the device. The button may not be immediately visible when looking at the device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE: The "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button is not the button you normally use to operate the device.

Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a rolling code. These devices will also not have a "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your garage door opener motor, follow the steps below:
NOTE: All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program, while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the garage door opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE: Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button three times (holding the button for two seconds

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
each time). If the garage door opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener 2
motor does not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning the programming process Ú page 47.
NOTE: Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to be performed multiple times to successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been previously trained, without erasing all the channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to determine whether the new device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in "Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener" and follow all remaining steps.

CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/ United States that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after several seconds of transmission, see the following.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some US gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every

two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/ device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and follow all remaining steps Ú page 466.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Headlight Switch 1 -- Rotate Headlight Switch 2 -- Ambient Light Dimmer Control 3 -- Instrument Panel Dimmer Control 4 -- Push Cargo Light 5 -- Push Front Fog Light
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light operation.

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a dedicated position below the headlight assembly. DRLs are active when the low beams are not on while the vehicle's transmission is in any position (automatic transmission), or when the vehicle begins to move (manual transmission).
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the DRLs will automatically deactivate when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
The High/Low Beam Switch is located within the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering wheel. High beam headlights can be used for improved visibility in low lit areas when there is no oncoming traffic. Otherwise, it is

recommended to use the low beam headlights to reduce glare to other vehicles. With the headlight switch activated, push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The lever will return to the centered position. To return the headlights to low beam, pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push the lever toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automatically controlling the high beams through the use of a camera mounted

on the vehicle's header. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off by selecting "ON" under "Auto High Beam" within your Uconnect Settings Ú page 224, as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position and placing the multifunction lever in the high beam position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
The Flash-To-Pass feature will illuminate the high beam headlights temporarily to signal another vehicle of a passing occurrence. Pull and hold the Multifunction Lever to activate the

Flash-To-Pass feature. When the lever is released, the Flash-To-Pass feature will deactivate.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS -- IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Headlight System will turn the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds (programmable through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 224) after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime when the driver's door is opened.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS -- IF EQUIPPED
The Front Fog Lights are located on the front of the vehicle below the headlights. When activated, these lights add illumination directed at the driving surface to aid in poor visibility conditions. To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking lights or low beam headlights and push the fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51 NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED 2
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BED LIGHTS -- IF EQUIPPED
The bed lights will illuminate the bed and cargo area. Bed lights are turned on by pushing the bed light switch located on the lower half of the headlight switch.
Bed Light Switch

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn the lights off.
The bed lights will turn on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The Interior Courtesy Lights will turn on when the front doors are opened, by rotating the instrument panel dimmer control (dial on the right) on the headlight switch fully upward while the doors are closed, or if equipped, when the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.
The Interior Courtesy Lights are located in the center of the vehicle's sport bar, and consist of one large center light and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second time will turn the light off.

Interior Courtesy Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as "Party" mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.
DIMMER CONTROLS
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are located on the left side of the instrument panel.

Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the ambient light levels below the instrument panel, near the floor.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column; it operates the multiple wiper options. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.

WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Front Wiper Control
CAUTION! In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.

Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold until desired spray is reached. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

Once the switch is released the washer will resume normal operation.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not

see other vehicles or other obstacles. To

avoid sudden icing of the windshield during

freezing weather, warm the windshield with

the defroster before and during windshield

washer use.

Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see Ú page 405.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.

A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. This feature automatically controls the interior cabin

temperature by adjusting distribution and blower speed. AUTO Mode is highly recommended for efficiency. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic mode Ú page 59.
Front Defrost
Turn the Mode control knob to Front Defrost to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION! 2
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

NOTE: The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob or press one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the blower knob to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting Set the temperature control knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit. A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

NOTE:

For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is

in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be

turned off, but the A/C system shall remain

active to prevent fogging of the windows.

If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.

If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped) illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED on the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost
Turn the Mode control knob to Front Defrost to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will return to the previous setting.

Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise increases the heating temperature and turning the temperature control knob counterclockwise decreases the heating temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The blower speeds increase as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) -- IF EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or 2
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-programmable feature within Uconnect Settings Ú page 224.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
"Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees"
"Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees"

Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of time, see Ú page 443.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

Stop/Start System -- If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer -- If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold weather manual start with full defrost, and when the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).

Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the climate control functions will resume their previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
NOTE: The below chart is for Manual Override Operation, otherwise run in AUTO.

WEATHER

CONTROL SETTINGS

Set the mode control

to (Panel Mode),

(MAX A/C) on, and

Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll

Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for

Hot

a minute to flush out

the hot air. Adjust the

controls as needed to

achieve comfort.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

WEATHER Warm Weather
Cool Sunny Cool & Humid
Conditions
Cold Weather

CONTROL SETTINGS

Turn (A/C) on and

set the mode control

to (Panel Mode).

Operate in

(Bi-Level Mode).

Set the mode control to (Mix Mode) and
turn on (A/C) to keep windows clear.

Set the mode control to (Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to (Mix
Mode).

INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Non-Locking Storage Wall

Glove Compartment Release Handle
WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with the glove compartment in the open position. Driving with the glove compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment The center console has both an upper and lower storage compartment. To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top latch. To access the lower storage compartment, lift the bottom latch.

Center Console 1 -- Upper Console Storage Latch 2 -- Lower Console Storage Latch
Under Seat Storage -- If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with two options for under seat storage: Non-Locking Storage Wall Under Seat Locking Storage Bin

Non-Locking Storage Wall
The Non-Locking Storage Wall can be used for storage by folding the bottom of the rear seat up and placing items behind the wall.
There is also an option to remove the wall by removing the four bolts that connect the storage wall to the floor.

Locking Storage Bin

The Locking Storage Bin can be removed by unfastening the four bolts that attach the bin to the vehicle floor using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet. The bottom of the storage bin has rubber mats that need to be removed to access the four bolts. These bolts can then be stored in the fastener bin below the rear seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Your Locking Storage Bin also has a front handle that makes it easier to carry and pull out from the floor of the vehicle when the four bolts that attach the bin to the floor are removed.
2

Under Seat Locking Storage Bin Location
If equipped, the Locking Storage Bin is located below the rear seats. It can be accessed by folding the rear seat bottom upward into the Stadium Position.
The Locking Storage Bin has two keyed locks on the front of the bin and uses the same key as the glove compartment and the center console for your vehicle.
Inside the bin are three removable dividers to set up storage that works best for you.

Under Seat Storage (Open View)
1 -- Key Locks 2 -- Removable Bolts 3 -- Handle

Locking Storage Bin (Closed View)
Rear Behind Seat Storage -- If Equipped The rear wall storage bin is located behind the right rear seat.

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rear Wall Storage Bin

Rear Wall Netting
The rear wall netting can be accessed the same way as the rear wall storage bin.

2. Remove the three nuts from the bottom of the Fastener Bin.
NOTE: The soft top fasteners do not go in the Fastener Bin.

Rear Wall Storage Bin
1 -- Rear Wall Storage Bin 2 -- Pull Strap
To access the storage bin, pull upward on the pull strap located on the upper outboard side of the right rear seat, and fold the seatback forward.
NOTE: The rear seatback can be locked using the vehicle key to secure items in the rear wall storage bin. The seat lock is located on the upper outboard side of each seatback. Both seatbacks should be locked to limit access to items behind seat.

Rear Wall Netting
Fastener Bin
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fastener Bin used to store the fasteners for the doors, windshield, and hard top (if equipped) while not in use. The Fastener Bin is located behind the rear seat storage bin. The Fastener Bin contains foam inserts for each of the fasteners; they are removable.
To remove the Fastener Bin:
1. Remove the lid and foam inserts from the Fastener Bin.

Fastener Bin
1 -- Door Removal 2 -- Under Seat Storage Bin Removal 3 -- Folding Windshield 4 -- Hard Top Removal
AUX/USB CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel, below the climate controls. Behind the media hub access door, the Media Hub contains one AUX port, a Type C USB port and

one standard USB port. Both USB ports allow you to play music from smartphones or USB devices through the vehicle's sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may activate Android AutoTM or Apple CarPlay® features, if equipped. For further information, refer to the Owner's Manual Supplement or Ú page 267.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time and both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one port can transfer data to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select the device transferring data.
Both ports share a single data connection. The user cannot switch between Type A and Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow you to select which device to use.

Media Hub
1 -- AUX Port 2 -- Type C USB Port 3 -- Type A USB Port
Located inside the center console, a second USB port allows you to only charge USB devices.
Depending on your vehicle's specifications, the USB port may contain playback capabilities and will allow you to play music from your smartphone device or USB devices through your vehicle's sound system.
A third and fourth USB port are located behind the center console, above the power inverter. Both ports are charge only.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
USB (Charge Only) On The Back Of The Center Console When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the USB ports, the following message will display depending on the device being utilized: "A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost". "(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost". "Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device to use the second device".
WARNING! Do not plug in or remove the external device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a collision.

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
JEEP® WIRELESS SPEAKER -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless Bluetooth® speaker. Getting To Know Your Speaker

Jeep® Wireless Speaker Location

Speaker Buttons
1 -- Power ON/OFF 2 -- Bluetooth®/App Pairing 3 -- Play/Pause 4 -- Volume Down/Skip Back 5 -- Voice Control/Call Control 6 -- Volume Up/Skip Forward

Rear Speaker Outlets
1 -- Reset Button 2 -- Battery Status Button 3 -- Service/Diagnostic Port (Non-charging, Non-customer use port) 4 -- Type A USB Charging Port 5 -- Battery Status LED 6 -- Speaker Charging Port 7 -- AUX Port

Wireless Speaker Location
The Jeep® wireless speaker is located behind the right rear passenger seat. In order to access the Jeep® wireless speaker, the seat will need to be folded down or tilted forward.
To remove the Jeep® wireless speaker, pull on the strap located on top of the mount for the speaker. When the strap is pulled, the Jeep® wireless speaker can easily be lifted from the mount.
When placing the Jeep® wireless speaker back in the mount, simply put the speaker back in the mount.

Placement of the Wireless Speaker Then push/rotate forward on the front of the speaker until the speaker locks in place.
Rotating the Wireless Speaker

Charging External Devices The Jeep® wireless speaker is capable of charging most USB-enabled smartphones and tablets using the type A USB charging port.
To use the external charging feature:
1. Turn the speaker on.
2. Plug the USB power cable into the type A USB charging port on the back of the speaker.
3. Insert the other end of the USB power cable into your device to immediately begin charging.
Charging The Speaker Before using the Jeep® wireless speaker for the first time, fully charge your Jeep® wireless speaker until the battery indicator light stays solid green.
The Jeep® wireless speaker in-vehicle dock is the most ideal way to fully charge the speaker with the ignition in ON/RUN or ACC. The speaker can also be charged with a power adapter.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: Jeep® wireless speaker will not charge within vehicle dock while the ignition is fully off.
To charge the Jeep® wireless speaker with a
power adapter, insert the power adapter into a 2
wall outlet. Next, plug the power adapter into the Jeep® wireless speaker charging port on the back of the speaker.
NOTE: Power adapter needed for the Jeep® wireless speaker has to have a range of 14 VDC to 16.5 VDC, with a minimum of 2.7A and a barrel connector dimension of 5.5 mm by 2.5 mm. Power adapter is not included.

Monitoring Battery Level Status LED Light

Red

40% or lower

Yellow

40% to 70%

Green

70% to 100%

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Temperature
Temperature
Speaker state (docked or Direct Current [DC] plugged in)
Speaker state (undocked and running off battery)
Speaker's Internal Battery Charging

<-4°F (< -20°C)
Off
Off No

-4 to 32°F (< -20 to 0°C)
On
On No

32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C)
On
On Yes

115 to 140°F (46 to 60°C)
On
On No

>140°F (>60°C)
Off
Off No

The Jeep® wireless speaker contains a lithium-ion rechargeable battery. Typical charging temperatures for these types of batteries are from 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F).
NOTE: The functions described are for when the Jeep® wireless speaker is undocked from the vehicle. When plugged into the docking station, the Jeep® wireless speaker functions as part of the vehicle's sound system.
Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is the ability for the Jeep® wireless speaker to connect to devices using Bluetooth®. Follow

these simple steps to connect a Bluetooth®-enabled device to the Jeep® wireless speaker:
1. Press and hold the power button for 2-3 seconds to turn the Jeep® wireless speaker on.
2. Turn "on" Bluetooth® for the device you desire to be connected to the Jeep® wireless speaker. For instructions on how to turn on and off Bluetooth® settings for the desired device, refer to the device's user manual.
3. When powered on, the Jeep® wireless speaker will automatically enter pairing mode. To pair a second device, press and hold the Bluetooth® button for 2-3 seconds,

until an audio cue is heard. Then go to the devices' Bluetooth® settings and select "Jeep® Speaker" from the list.
The Jeep® wireless speaker will remember the last eight devices it has paired with.
NOTE: If the Jeep® wireless speaker is left on with an inactive Bluetooth® connection for 30 minutes, it will automatically turn off. The Jeep® wireless speaker can be turned on again by pressing and holding the power button for 2-3 seconds.

Resetting Your Jeep® Wireless Speaker
To reset the Jeep® wireless speaker to its original factory setting, press and hold the reset button under the back cover for 8-10 seconds.
Speakerphone
The speakerphone feature can be used by pressing the "Voice Control" button on the Jeep® wireless speaker. This feature can be used to answer and end calls over the speakerphone.
Volume And Playback Control
Volume can be increased or decreased by briefly pressing the + button or - button. When the maximum volume is reached, an audio cue will sound.
To skip to the next track, press and hold the + button. To go to the previous track, press the button.
Qualcomm TrueWirelessTM Stereo
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is being able to pair two Jeep® wireless speakers together for Qualcomm TrueWirelessTM Stereo. This feature allows for two Jeep® wireless speakers to play left and right stereo sound.

Below are the steps needed for Qualcomm TrueWirelessTM Stereo:
1. Push and hold the power button on both Jeep® wireless speakers until both speakers turn on.
2. Place both speakers into Qualcomm TrueWirelessTM Stereo pairing mode. This can be achieved by pressing and holding the Battery Status button on both speakers until an audio notification is heard from both speakers.
3. Connect one of the Jeep® wireless speakers to the Bluetooth® source. Refer to previous section "Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing" for additional information.
4. Once the Jeep® wireless speaker is connected to the Bluetooth® device, audio will be played from both speakers.
NOTE: While in Qualcomm TrueWirelessTM Stereo mode, the volume will not have independent speaker control. Pushing the Up or Down Volume button on either Jeep® wireless speaker will affect the audio output on both, as well as volume adjustments on the Bluetooth® device.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Waterproof Features
The Jeep® wireless speaker is IP67 waterproof certified with design in mind to withstand rainfall, waterjets, splashing or submerged in
up to 3 ft (1 m) of water for up to 30 minutes. 2
CAUTION!
Ensure the Jeep® Wireless Speaker is prepared for use in wet environments by removing all cable connections and making sure all port covers are sealed tightly. If the cover is not secured properly, the Jeep® Wireless Speaker may sustain water damage.
Warnings, Caution & Legal Information
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose the Jeep® wireless speaker to rain or moisture while charging. The Jeep® wireless speaker should not be exposed to dripping or splashing, and objects filled with liquids, such as vases, should not be placed on or near it while being charged or charging other devices. As with any electronic products, use care not to spill liquids into any part of the product. Liquids can cause a failure and/or a fire hazard. The power supply must be used indoors only. Make no modifications to the product or accessories.

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unauthorized alterations may compromise safety, regulatory compliance, and system performance, and will void the warranty. Do not place any flame sources, such as lighted candles, on or near the Jeep® wireless speaker. The Jeep® wireless speaker contains small parts that may be a choking hazard and is not suitable for children under age 3. Do not continue charging the battery if it does not reach full charge within the specified charging time. Overcharging may cause the battery to become hot, rupture, or ignite. If you see any heat deformation or leakage, properly dispose of the battery. Do not attempt to charge the battery in temperatures outside the range of 32°- 104°F (0° - 40°C). If the battery begins to leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with your skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical attention immediately. Do not expose the Jeep® wireless speaker or battery to excessive heat, including direct sunlight or fire. Do not store or use inside cars in hot weather, where it can be exposed to temperatures in excess of 115°F (60°C). Doing so may cause the battery and power supply to generate heat, rupture, or ignite. Using the Jeep® wireless speaker in this manner also

may result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy. Extended exposure to direct sunlight may damage the external appearance and material qualities. Do not step on, throw, or drop batteries or the power supply or device, or expose them to a strong shock. Do not pierce, crush, dent, or deform the batteries or power supply in any way. If either becomes deformed, properly dispose of it. Do not short-circuit batteries. Do not attempt to service the Jeep® wireless speaker yourself. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards and will void the manufacturer's warranty. To prevent risk of fire or electric shock, avoid overloading wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles. Your Bluetooth® device (mobile phone, music player, tablet, laptop, etc.) must support the A2DP Bluetooth® profile in order to work wirelessly with your Jeep® wireless speaker. The A2DP profile is supported by most recent mobile products with built-in Bluetooth® capability. Please refer to your device's user manual for details and instruction regarding the Bluetooth® profiles it supports. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Jeep® follows Safety Instruction for CE- LV. Do not operate products in temperatures outside the range of -5 to 40°C. Operating Frequency Band: 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz Maximum RF power: 6 dBm EIRP. Do not install this equipment in a confined space or building, such as a bookcase or similar unit that is not well-ventilated. The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspaper, tablecloths, curtains etc.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture. Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the apparatus.
WARNING!
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. If the battery or battery pack is exposed to excessive heat or fire, personal injury may occur.

CAUTION!
If needed, Jeep® wireless speaker should be cleaned using a damp cloth and water. Do not use alkaline products like soap or abrasive chemicals to clean the Jeep® wireless speaker as it could cause damage to it.
NOTE: Please refer to the information on the bottom of the Jeep® wireless speaker for electrical and safety information before installing or operating the Jeep® wireless speaker.
Directive 2014/53/EU Article 10 Obligations of Manufacturers
2. Manufacturers shall ensure that radio equipment shall be so constructed that it can be operated in at least one Member State without infringing applicable requirements on the use of radio spectrum.
10. In cases of restrictions on putting in to service or of requirements for authorization of use, information available on the packaging shall allow the identification of the Member States or the geographical area within a Member State where restrictions on putting into service or requirements for authorization of use

exist. The Commission may adopt implementing acts specifying how to present that information. Those implementing acts shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 45 (2).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by FCA US LLC is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
POWER OUTLETS
There is a 12 Volt (13 A) auxiliary power outlet that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls, and is powered from the ignition switch. Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Front Power Outlet WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death: Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 A) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 A) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTERS -- IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 V (400 W) maximum inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert Direct Current (DC) to Alternating Current (AC).

This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter There may also be a second 115 V (400 W) maximum exterior power inverter located on the rear right side of the truck bed near the tailgate. This inverter can be turned on by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to the left of the steering wheel. This inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed

this limit, as will most power tools. The indicator light on the power inverter switch will be illuminated when the inverter is turned on.
Power Inverter Switch (If Equipped)

NOTE: 400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet. If two outlets are in use, 400 W is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded, the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset.
NOTE:
The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter will turn off if the power rating is exceeded.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES -- IF EQUIPPED 2
Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel and can be used to power various electrical devices.
The functionality of the auxiliary switches can be changed via the Uconnect settings. All switches can be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.

Exterior Truck Bed Power Inverter (If Equipped)

WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use.
(Continued)

Auxiliary Switches

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition within Uconnect Settings Ú page 224.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power four blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the instrument panel in the passenger compartment and under the hood to the right, near the battery.

Auxiliary Switch Connections -- Under Hood

In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the interior, on the passenger side under the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation of your electrical devices.

Auxiliary Switch Connections Under Instrument Panel

Wire Color Chart Circuit Function Aux Switch 1
Aux Switch 2
Aux Switch 3
Aux Switch 4 Battery Ignition

Fuse F93 40 Amp
F92 40 Amp
F103 15 Amp
F108 15 Amp F72 10 Amp F50 10 Amp

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75

Wire Color Beige/Pink
Green/Pink
Orange/Pink
Dark Blue/Pink Red/White Pink/Orange

Locations

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &

Underhood (right side near battery)

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &

Underhood (right side near battery)

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)

POWER WINDOWS -- IF EQUIPPED
The power windows feature allows for movement of the windows with the push of a button. The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the window and pull upward to close the window.

The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window. The bottom left switch controls the left rear window and the bottom right switch controls the right rear window.

WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly, without going past the detent, and release it when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
There are window switches located on the rear of the center console for the rear passenger windows.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power window switch and the front passenger door power window switch have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down, past the detent, and release and the window will go down automatically.

WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW -- IF EQUIPPED
To open the rear sliding window, push the release button inward while sliding the window into the open position.

Release Button Location
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, rotate the switch downward. To enable the window controls, rotate the switch upward.

WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
GLADIATOR TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the necessary tools required for the operations described in the following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.

NOTE: The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops being installed at the same time.
Provided Tools 1 -- Ratchet 2 -- #T50 Torx Head Driver 3 -- #T40 Torx Head Driver 4 -- 15 mm Socket
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top system will be provided in a separate box located in the bed of the vehicle for shipping purposes only.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
2
WARNING! The fabric quarter panel cover assemblies,
rear window, and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements. Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts. Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch points when installing and removing the soft top. The side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in-between.

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains.

CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash. Window scratches and wax build up may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully lowered.
Follow the proper steps for cleaning and caring for your vehicle's fabric top Ú page 445.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing. Damage to the top may result.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains, or mildew on the top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

1 -- #1 Bow 2 -- #2 Bow 3 -- #3 Bow 4 -- #4 Bow 5 -- #5 Bow

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Side View Top And Components 6 -- Quarter Panel Upper Hook And Loop 7 -- Quarter Panel Vertical Retainer 8 -- Rear Window Vertical Retainer 9 -- Quarter Panel Cover Assembly

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1 -- Top Retainer 2 -- Left Vertical Retainer 3 -- Lower Retainers

Rear Window View And Components
4 -- Pull Tabs 5 -- Lower Center Retainer 6 -- Right Vertical Retainer

Lowering The Soft Top Into The Sunrider® Position:
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is fully disengaged from its receiver.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81 5. Secure the top in this position by using the
two hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the center console.
2

Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to fold the soft top rearward.

Step Five
NOTE: The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® Position with the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies fully installed or completely removed.

Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1 Bow of the soft top to begin the operation. It is recommended to utilize two people for this procedure.

Step Four

CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window must be either all in or all out.

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Rear Window And Quarter Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE: Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear window must ALL be removed together, or installed together.
1. Start by removing the rear window first. Use the two straps located on the bottom of each side of the rear window to remove the right and left vertical retainers, as well as the lower center retainer.

Step One
2. While keeping the rear window level, slide it outward in either direction until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull downward while removing the rear window. Damage to the retainer could result. Store the rear window in the soft top rear window storage bag (if equipped), or in a safe location Ú page 83.

Step Two
3. After removing the rear window, remove the quarter panel cover assemblies starting with either side. Disengage the quarter panel cover assembly from the bottom by pulling the fabric at the bottom upward.

Step One (Right Side Shown)

4. With two hands, grab the front of the quarter panel cover assembly and pull outward to disengage it from its retainer on the door frame.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2

Step Four
5. Pull the quarter panel cover assembly up and out from the bottom, then pull it down and away from the vehicle to remove.

Step Five
6. Repeat this procedure for the other quarter panel cover assembly. Store the assemblies in the soft top rear window storage bag (if equipped), or a safe location.
Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag -- If Equipped To safely store the soft top rear window, proceed as follows:
1. With the bag opened completely, fold the fabric divider downward and lay the rear window in the bottom of the bag.

Step One 2. Fold the divider upward, covering the rear
window.
Step Two

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lay the first quarter panel cover assembly all the way to the right side and the second quarter panel cover assembly on the left side. Secure both using the two hook-and-loop fastener straps on each side.
NOTE: The quarter panel cover assemblies are marked "1" and "2" on the inside of the panel assembly.

4. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.

Step Three
1 -- Left Quarter Panel Cover Assembly 2 -- Right Quarter Panel Cover Assembly

Step Four
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
1. From the Sunrider® Position, remove straps if previously secured.

Step One
CAUTION! Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to the soft top or vehicle.

2. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the front of the vehicle, manually guiding the top into the closed position.

3. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2

Step Two

Step Three
4. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the hook, locking the latch into place.

Step Four
5. Repeat steps three and four on the other side.
Installing The Rear Window And Quarter Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE: Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear window must ALL be removed together, or installed together.

Step Two

86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies were previously removed, proceed as follows to install:
1. Guide the top of the quarter panel cover assembly up into the retainer.

2. Engage the plastic retainers on the front of the cover assembly (toward the front of the vehicle) starting at the top, and working downward.

Step One
CAUTION! Failure to follow all quarter panel cover assembly and rear window install steps could result in damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.

Step Three
4. From either side, guide the rear window into the retainer while keeping the window level.
Step Two NOTE: It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged before the vehicle resumes motion.
3. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front corner of each quarter panel cover assembly by pressing firmly.
Step Four

5. Engage the retainer along the bottom of the rear window beginning on the left side of the vehicle and working toward the center. Then, move to the right side of the vehicle and continue from the center, working to the right until the rear window is secured in the lower retainer.
Step Six 7. Tuck the rear window under the soft top
fabric and press firmly.
Step Five 6. Engage the vertical retainers up the right
and left side of the rear window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
8. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and left corners.

CAUTION!

Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear

window must be either all in or all out.

REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top to the Sunrider® position Ú page 77.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to the soft top or vehicle.

Step Seven

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head fasteners on the inside of each top mechanism.
Step Two

3. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle's sport bar and trim. Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry location.
4. Remove the door frames. The rear door frames must be removed before the front door frames Ú page 97.
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, unscrew the six Torx head fasteners on both rear corners and the back of the cab, then remove the belt rail.
NOTE: Folding down the rear seats is recommended to provide easier access to the fasteners.

Step Five
1 -- Rear Fasteners 2 -- Corner Fasteners

INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP

NOTE: If installing the soft top immediately after removing the hard top, ensure the wire harness is stored properly, and not tucked under the belt rail Ú page 94.

1. Install the belt rail on the rear of the vehicle. Secure the belt rail using the six fasteners with the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to the table below for recommended torque specifications.

Torque Specification
For Torx Fastener
119.5 in-lb (13.5 N·m)

Maximum
150.5 in-lb (17.0 N·m)

Minimum
106.2 in-lb (12.0 N·m)

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the retainers will occur.

Step One
1 -- Rear Fasteners 2 -- Corner Fasteners
2. Install the door frames. Start with both front doors, followed by both rear doors. Apply the appropriate torque specifications for the door frame Torx head fasteners Ú page 97.
CAUTION! Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to the soft top or vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89 3. Unsnap and remove the storage bag. This
bag should be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only. 4. Ensure the top is secured with the provided
hook-and-loop fasteners, then lift the soft 2
top onto the rear of the cab. Line up the locater pins (one on each side of the soft top) with the rear door frames.
Step Four

90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, install and tighten the Torx fasteners by turning them clockwise. Secure them until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten. Refer to the following table for recommended torque specifications. Repeat on the opposite side.

Torque Specification
For Torx Fasteners
119.5 in-lbs (13.5 N·m)

Maximum
150.5 in-lbs (17.0 N·m)

Minimum
106.2 in-lbs (12.0 N·m)

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened.

6. Before driving the vehicle with the top in the Sunrider® position, ensure the top is secured with the provided hook-and-loop fasteners Ú page 84.

Step Six

Step Five

HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
CAUTION! The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires, building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc Ú page 109. Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the front header, sport bar, and body side, or fully removed.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door, or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91

CAUTION! (Continued)

Careless handling and storage of the

removable roof panels may damage the

seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1 -- Right Side Panel 2 -- Left Side Panel 3 -- Hard Top

Hard Top Components

NOTE: The left side panel must be removed before removing the right side panel. 1. Fold down the sun visor against the
windshield. 2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left
side panel (one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking them from the roof.
Step Two 1 -- Rear Panel Lock 2 -- Front Panel Lock 3 -- Outside Panel Lock

3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at the top of the windshield.
Step Three 1 -- Header Panel Latched 2 -- Header Panel Unlatched 4. Remove the left side panel. 5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right
side panel. Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag -- If Equipped The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to store your hard top panels. The storage bag contains two compartments.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Lay the bag for the panels down so the loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to 2
inserting the panel into the panels bag.
There is a pouch located on the front of the bag to store the provided hard top edge protectors that are used when the hard top is not installed on the vehicle.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is laying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag with the latches facing downward.
NOTE: Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag.

94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top
bag closed.
Step Four 5. Store the Freedom Top panels bag in a safe
location.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) INSTALLATION
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame with the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole, followed by the left side panel, making sure there is no overhang. Make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body.

2. Secure the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in reverse order.
NOTE: To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels should be clear of any dust and debris prior to reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
1. Remove both front panels Ú page 91.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet, remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front doors).

Step Three 4. If equipped, remove the lower interior soft
trim panel (attached by the hook-and-loop fastener) by pulling the panel away from the trim.
Step Four

5. Remove the Torx head fasteners that secure the hard top to the vehicle: two along the interior bodyside, rearward of the back doors, followed by the four fasteners along the back of the vehicle cab using the #T50 Torx head driver.

NOTE: Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
2

Step Five
1 -- Bodyside Torx Head Fasteners 2 -- Vehicle Cab Torx Head Fasteners

Step Six
7. To release the wire harness, pull back on the red latch (1), then push down on the black button (2) while pulling the harness out.

6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle. To access the harness, remove the plastic cover by pushing the cover to the side, and sliding it off.

Step Seven
1 -- Red Latch 2 -- Black Button
8. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Install the provided edge protectors along the bottom edges of the hard top, and place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
CAUTION! The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the Freedom Top.

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 9. Store the wire harness by removing the
storage cover on the quarter trim. Use the mechanical key blade to pry the cover open.
Step Nine 10. Tuck the wire harness inside the storage
compartment, and replace the cover.

CAUTION!
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires, building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc Ú page 109.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside, or fully removed.
The removal of the hard top requires four adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the hard top.

INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top Ú page 97.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle while making sure that the top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and across the back. Then follow the removal steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary.
Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order.
When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel: Be sure the panel is centered so that there is an even gap on both sides.
Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop fasteners to ensure they are properly secured.

Step Ten

The Torx head fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 155 in-lb +/- 22 in-lb (17.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the retainers will occur.
DOOR FRAME -- IF EQUIPPED WITH A SOFT TOP
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE: The rear door frames must be removed first, followed by the front door frames.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97

1. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver

and ratchet, loosen the Torx head

fasteners located on the underside of each

door hinge (two per door), and remove the

fasteners by pulling downward.

Step One
NOTE: The fasteners will not fall out once completely loose, as they are held in place by design.

98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door and/or door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

Step One 2. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the
vehicle.
Step Two 3. Store the fasteners in a secure location. 4. Repeat the procedure on the front door
frame.

DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION
1. Install the front door frame first.
2. Ensure the windshield is in the "up" position. Carefully place the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the Torx head fasteners (two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the door frame, and insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with the #T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten. Refer to the following table for the appropriate torque specifications for the door frame fasteners.

Tighten Fasteners

Target Torque Specification
For Torx Fasteners
44.2 in-lbs (5 N·m)

Maximum
53.1 in-lbs (6 N·m)

Minimum
35.4 in-lbs (4 N·m)

CAUTION! Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened.
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side, just behind the rear door opening.

5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the rear belt rail and the rear of the front door frame, making sure the rubber seals lay flat. Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Step Five

6. Insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with the #T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten. Refer to the previous table for the appropriate torque specifications for the door frame fasteners.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural element that can provide protection in some accidents. The windshield also provides protection against weather, road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down, as you lose the protection this structural element provides.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be folded down. However, the protection afforded by the windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
(16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that
required its removal is completed and before 2
you return to on-road driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is securely fastened, either up or down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all times when the windshield is down. (Continued)

Step Five

100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers' protection in some accidents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may cause personal injury.

CAUTION! Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the vehicle's header seal.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the windshield wiper hex bolts.

4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun visors.
5. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, remove the four Torx head fasteners located along the interior of the windshield (two on each side of the header trim).

LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the steps below: If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top, the top MUST be lowered Ú page 77, and the door frames must be removed Ú page 97 prior to lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hard top, the Freedom Panels MUST be removed prior to lowering the windshield Ú page 91.

Step Two
1 -- Hex Bolt Cover Installed 2 -- Hex Bolt Cover Removed
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.

Step Five
1 -- Outer Torx Fasteners 2 -- Center Torx Fasteners
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping, or in the fastener bin located below the rear seat.

6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six 1 -- Washer Nozzle 2 -- Bumper 3 -- Tie-Down 7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch
strap through the tie-down bumper on either side of the hood and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place.

CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could result.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective Cover -- If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover that is to be used whenever the windshield is folded down in order to protect the ACC/FCW sensor. To install the cover, follow the instructions below:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
Protective Cover Installed NOTE: Be sure to remove the cover before returning the windshield to the normal position. Store the cover in the cargo area. Cleaning Instructions During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and inside cover, being careful not to damage or scratch the module.

102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, reinstall the four Torx head fasteners located along the interior of the windshield (two on each side of the header trim). Secure them until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten.

4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the blade to the "T" mark in the glass. Then, while holding the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten. Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm hex bolts and push gently until they snap into place.

NOTE: Make sure the windshield is raised prior to installing the tops.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Release both the hood latches.

Step Three
1 -- Outer Torx Fasteners 2 -- Center Torx Fasteners

Step Five
1 -- Hex Bolt Cover Installed 2 -- Hex Bolt Cover Removed

Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the right to open the hood. You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch. Remove support rod from the hood, and insert into the radiator crossmember.

CLOSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the radiator crossmember, and install into the clip on the hood. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
TAILGATE
OPENING

To open the tailgate, pull the release handle located on the center of the tailgate and guide it to the lowered position.
The tailgate is dampened to provide a slower, more controlled lowering.
THREE-POSITION TAILGATE
The vehicle's tailgate can be set to three positions: open, mid, or closed. The mid position can be used to provide a loading surface for transporting sheet goods.
To use the mid position, open the tailgate and lower it to near mid position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103 Secure the tailgate in this position by looping the tailgate straps behind the circular retainer on both sides.
2
Loop Tailgate Strap Behind Circular Retainer Ensure the tailgate strap is properly seated behind the circular retainer against the sides of the sheet metal.

Tailgate Release Handle

Tailgate In Mid Position

104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Correctly Seated Tailgate Strap Incorrectly Seated Tailgate Strap

When hauling cargo using the mid position and the tailgate, you must support the load at two forward locations: At the top of the rear wheelhouse (1) Between the wheelhouse and the tailgate (2)
Chamfered Boards In Pickup Box 1 -- Support Location 1 2 -- Support Location 2

NOTE: Failure to support the load at these two forward locations could result in damage.
Three 2x4 boards are needed to provide support at locations (1) and (2). Each board will need to be cut to fit inside the pickup box.
The support at location (1) should be seated in the dedicated formation on top of the wheelhouses.
The support at location (2) should use the remaining two 2x4s. Stack the boards and place them into the formation in the side wall of the pickup box. The corners of the bottom board will need to be chamfered to fit.
NOTE:
All cargo transported in the pickup box must be secured.
The maximum payload for the mid position is 500 lbs (226 kg).

CLOSING
To close the tailgate, lift upward until both sides latch into place.
CAUTION!
After closing, pull back on the tailgate firmly to ensure it is securely latched. Failure to securely latch the tailgate could result in damage to the vehicle or cargo.

BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105 There are two adjustable utility rail cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
2

NOTE:
If the tonneau cover is installed, make sure the tonneau cover is fully closed before closing the tailgate.
Due to the presence of the Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp, removal of the tailgate is not recommended.

The Bed Rail Tie Down system allows you to properly secure cargo in the truck bed.

Bed Rail Tie Down Locations

Adjustable Cleat Assembly
1 -- Utility Rail Detent 2 -- Cleat Retainer Nut 3 -- Utility Rail Cleat
Each utility rail cleat must be tightened down in one of the detents along either utility rail in order to keep cargo properly secured.
To move the utility rail cleat to any position on the utility rail, turn the cleat retainer nut counterclockwise several times. Then, pull out on the utility rail cleat and slide it to the detent

106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
nearest the desired location. Make sure the utility rail cleat is seated in the detent, and tighten the nut.
To remove the utility rail cleats from the side utility rails, slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located at the end of the rail toward the front of the vehicle.
To remove the utility rail cleat from the front utility rail, slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located on the left side of the rail.
TONNEAU COVER -- IF EQUIPPED
The Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck bed to keep cargo out of view, and protect from inclement weather.
The Tonneau Cover consists of the following features:
Easy roll up cover
Tonneau fore/aft locator
Crossbar inside bed locator
Rear latches
Stowage straps

NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be rolled up and secured at the front of the truck bed without removing it completely.
TONNEAU COVER INSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows: 1. Position the rolled up Tonneau Cover on
the truck bed and align it to the two fastener locations at the front of the bed.
Fastener Locations 2. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, secure the
fasteners to the bed. 3. Lower the tailgate to the fully open position
before unrolling the Tonneau Cover.

4. Release the stowage straps used to secure the Tonneau Cover in the rolled up position.
Release Stowage Strap 5. Roll the Tonneau Cover rearward toward the
back of the truck bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Rearward

6. Position both Tonneau Cover latches over the locking mechanisms (one on each side of the truck bed), making sure the plastic retainer is correctly seated in the forward part of the latch.

7. Once the rear Tonneau Cover bar is positioned over the locking mechanism, grab the back of the Tonneau Cover and push downward on the center to engage the locking mechanisms. Make sure an audible "click" from both sides of the Tonneau Cover are heard to confirm that the latch is completely engaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2

Correctly Seated Retainer

Push Downward To Lock
NOTE: If desired, the Tonneau Cover can be left in this position (rear panel folded forward) while the tailgate is closed, or the tailgate can be raised to the mid-position Ú page 103.

Tonneau Cover With Tailgate In Mid-Position
8. Fold the rear panel down; the tailgate can now be raised and secured in place.
NOTE: If not leaving the tailgate in the mid-position, the Tonneau Cover must be closed completely prior to fully closing the tailgate.
CAUTION! Do not sit on the Tonneau Cover; damage to the cover and/or cargo will occur.

Incorrectly Seated Retainer

108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Fold the rear panel of the Tonneau Cover forward to reveal the red release straps.

4. Roll the Tonneau Cover forward, starting with the rear bar and continue to roll toward the front of the truck bed.

6. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, remove the two fasteners securing the Tonneau Cover to the front of the truck bed.

Roll Tonneau Cover Forward
5. Using the stowage straps, secure the Tonneau Cover in the rolled up position.

Release Strap Location
3. Pull one of the red release straps to release the Tonneau Cover latch.
NOTE: Pulling either strap will release the latches to roll the Tonneau Cover up; there is no need to pull both at the same time.

Secured Tonneau Cover

Fastener Locations
7. Utilizing two people, lift the Tonneau Cover up and away from the truck bed.
NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been completely rolled up, and straps are secure, before removing.
8. Store in a safe location.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONLY.
The Roof Luggage Rack is designed to allow for carrying an additional cargo load on a Hard Top Vehicle. The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load. (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109

CAUTION! (Continued)

Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners

carefully when carrying large or heavy loads

on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can

add sudden upward lift. It is recommended

to not carry large flat loads, such as wood

panels or surfboards, which may result in

damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.

110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster -- Gasoline

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
3
Premium Instrument Cluster -- Gasoline

112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Base Instrument Cluster -- Diesel

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
3
Premium Instrument Cluster -- Diesel

114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended that you call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H", turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display Ú page 115.

Instrument Cluster Display Location
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located Ú page 196.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle's systems and features. The driver interactive display, located in the instrument panel, indicates how systems are operating and gives you warnings when a system, or systems, needs your attention. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want to make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The display contains different areas of vehicle information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display Location
The top line where Reconfigurable Telltales, Compass Direction, Outside Temperature, Time, Range, Audio Info, MPG or Trip are displayed. This also displays the Speedometer which is an option for the upper center reconfigurable, but is not the default. Default setting is Menu Title.
The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed.
The lower line where telltales, menu name and menu page are displayed.

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 -- Left Arrow Button 2 -- Up Arrow Button 3 -- Right Arrow Button 4 -- Down Arrow Button 5 -- OK Button
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button allow you to cycle through the Main Menu Items. They allow you to change the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.

116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allow you to cycle through the submenu screens of the Main menu item. OK Button Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. To reset displayed/selected features push and hold the OK button for two seconds. The Main Menu items consist of the following: Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road -- If Equipped
Driver Assist -- If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Stop/Start -- If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup

OIL LIFE RESET -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the instrument cluster display.

3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
OFF ROAD+ DISPLAY -- IF EQUIPPED
When the Off Road+ button is pushed in the switch bank, the Instrument Cluster Display will begin to show messages related to the feature. Depending on the Four Wheel Drive mode in use, the messages will differ, and after five

seconds, all messages will clear from the display. The messages are as follows:
2H: Off Road+ Unavailable, Shift to 4WD
4H: 4WD High Off Road+ Active
4L: 4WD Low Off Road+ Active
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Cruise Control are not available when using Off-Road+. If either option is selected, a dedicated message will display indicating that the features are not usable concurrently. Messages are as follows:
4H: Cruise Control -- Cruise Control Unavailable in Off Road+
4H: Adaptive Cruise Control -- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable in Off Road+
4L: Cruise Control -- Cruise Control Unavailable in 4WD Low
4L: Adaptive Cruise Control -- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable in 4WD Low
NOTE: The behavior of Electronic Stability Control while in Off-Road+ varies depending on the 4WD status. If the vehicle is in 4H, Traction Control is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117

automatically turned off. Also, holding the ESC OFF button for five seconds will turn off ESC. In 4L, Electronic Stability Control automatically shuts off regardless of the Off Road Status.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY SELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the following main menu items:
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.

Speedometer Vehicle Info Off Road -- If
Equipped Messages Screen Setup

Stop/Start Audio Driver Assist -- If
Equipped Fuel Economy Trip Info

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
NOTE: Depending on the vehicle's options, feature settings may vary.

Speedometer

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle between mph and km/h.

Vehicle Info

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus and push and release the OK button to select or reset the resettable submenus.

Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature -- Automatic Transmission Only
Oil Temperature Battery Voltage

Coolant Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Life Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Level -- If Equipped

118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Off-Road -- If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Off-Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and numerical value of calculated average front wheel angle from the steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays "Lock" graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part Time or 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (if equipped): displays front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with text message (connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic with the angle number on the screen.

NOTE: When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch and roll, "- -" will display in place of the numbers, and the graphic will be grayed out. A message indicating the necessary speed for the feature to become available will also display.
Driver Assist -- If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC system.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature -- If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the steering wheel), and the following will display in the instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE: The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Ú page 177.

Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle left or right to select a display with or without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range The display shows the estimated distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles (16 km), the Range display will change to a "LOW" message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW" message and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average The display shows the average fuel economy (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) since the last reset.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119

Current The display shows the current fuel economy (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) while driving.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display, then push and release the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start -- If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start icon/title is

highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.

Phone Call Status

When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status

pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up

will remain until the phone is answered or

ignored.

NOTE: The call status will temporarily replace the previous media source information displayed on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the last used screen.

Stored Messages

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a closed envelope, and "No Stored Messages" will display.

120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Screen Setup
NOTE: The Screen Setup feature can only be used while the vehicle is not in motion.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location in which that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ

Current Econ Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Upper Center None Compass Outside Temp Time Range to Empty Average Econ Current Econ Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Audio Menu Title Speedometer Upper Right None Compass

Outside Temp Time Range to Empty Average Econ Current Econ Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Favorite Menus Speedometer Vehicle Info Off Road -- If Equipped (show/hide) Driver Assist -- If Equipped (show/hide) Fuel Economy (show/hide) Trip Info (show/hide) Stop / Start -- If Equipped Audio (show/hide) Messages Screen Setup

Gear Display -- If Equipped Full
Single
Current Gear Off
On
Odometer Show
Hide
Defaults Cancel
Restore
BATTERY SAVER ON, BATTERY SAVER MODE MESSAGE, AND ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message "Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power" will appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.

If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system Ú page 127.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel 3
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of the charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).

122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present ("Battery Saver On" or "Battery Saver Mode")
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)

Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and ignition off draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
DIESEL DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following messages display in the instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at Consistent Speeds to Clear

Exhaust Filter Full Power Reduced See Dealer
Exhaust System Service Required See Dealer
Exhaust System Filter XX% Full Service Required See Dealer
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue Driving
Exhaust System Regeneration Completed
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) MESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system's catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.

WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and those items coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The engine may be switched off even if the warning light is on: repeated interruptions of the regeneration process could cause an early deterioration of engine oil. For this reason it is always advisable to wait for the symbol to go off before turning off the engine, following the instructions above. Do not complete the DPF regeneration process when the vehicle is stopped.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. Refer to the following messages that may be displayed on your instrument cluster display:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123

Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at Consistent Speeds to Clear -- This message will be displayed if the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system may never reach the conditions required to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy" message will be displayed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition. By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy the condition in the particulate filter system and allow your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and restore the system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue Driving -- This message indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving condition until regeneration is completed.
Exhaust System -- Regeneration Completed -- This message indicates that the Diesel

Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition.

Exhaust System Service Required -- See

Dealer -- This message indicates regenera-

tion has been disabled due to a system malfunction. At this point the engine Power-

train Control Module (PCM) will register a

fault code, the instrument panel will display a

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) light.

CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon with continued operation.

Exhaust Filter Full -- Power Reduced See Dealer -- This message indicates the PCM has derated the engine to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To correct this condition it will be necessary to have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.

124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles (0 kilometers) remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and

reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct this condition.
CAUTION! See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon with continued operation.

FUEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following chart contains a list of different messages that may appear in the instrument cluster, depending on different system or fuel conditions. Use the descriptions to interpret what the message means and determine the best action to take.

MESSAGE
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Level Warning

DESCRIPTION
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Warning Messages:
The first low level warning will be given at around a 1,490 miles (2,400 km) range, and is determined according to the current consumption rate. The "UREA Low Level" warning light and message will display on the instrument panel. The UREA low level warning light will remain lit until the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is topped up with at least 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of UREA.
If the level is not resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to start the engine.
When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a message will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound. When the range is at 0, the display will show a dedicated message (if equipped). In this case, the engine will not restart.
It will be possible to restart the engine again as soon as AdBlue® (UREA) is added; the minimum amount required is 1.32 gallons (5 Liters). Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of UREA. If filling is completed with autonomy tank AdBlue® (UREA) to zero, it could be possible to wait 2 minutes before starting the vehicle.
NOTE: When the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, and the vehicle is stopped, it is no longer possible to restart the vehicle until a minimum of 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of AdBlue® (UREA) is added to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125

MESSAGE
Engine Will Not Restart Service AdBlue® System See Dealer
Engine Will Not Start Service AdBlue® System See Dealer
Exhaust System Service Required Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue Driving Exhaust System Regeneration Complete

DESCRIPTION

Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Fault Warning Messages:

This message will display if the AdBlue® (UREA) system issue detected is not serviced during the allowed

period. Your engine will not restart unless your vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. If the level is not

resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be

possible to start the engine. When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® tank is empty, a

message will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound.

NOTE:

The display may take up to five seconds to update after adding 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) or more of AdBlue® (UREA) to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank. If you have a fault related to the AdBlue® (UREA) system, the display may not update to the new level. See an authorized dealer for service.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures lower than 51.8°F (11°C). If the car stands for a long time at this temperature, refilling could be difficult. For this reason, it is advised to park the vehicle in a garage and/or heated environment, and wait for the AdBlue® (UREA) to return to liquid state before topping up.
Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) System Messages -- If Equipped:
The engine control unit has detected an issue with the gasoline particulate filter system. See an authorized dealer.
The regeneration procedure is controlled automatically by the engine control unit according to the filter conditions and car use conditions. The following may occur during regeneration: increased levels of Noise Vibration and Harshness (NVH) and reduced engine performance. The driver should continue driving normally. This message will continue to appear until regeneration is complete.

The exhaust gas filter regeneration has been completed. This message will briefly appear.

126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner's Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.

If the light is not on during startup, stay on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127

there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the EPS system Ú page 169.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to

indicate a problem with the ETC

system. If a problem is detected while

the vehicle is running, the light will

either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the

vehicle is safely and completely stopped and

the transmission is placed in the PARK position.

The light should turn off. If the light remains on

with the vehicle running, your vehicle will

usually be drivable; however, see an authorized

dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/ C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service Ú page 376.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a chime will sound, to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light and chime turn on while driving, safely stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is recommended to take the vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ RUN position and if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 321.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt

Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound Ú page 321.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light -- If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the

conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the

ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position, have the brake system inspected

by an authorized dealer.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active

Warning Light -- If Equipped

This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will remain on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low Ú page 394.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Service 4WD Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. It is recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service Ú page 313.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131

Service Stop/Start System Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Cruise Control System is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light -- If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in the sway bar disconnect system Ú page 161.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire life and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat

tires as handling may be compromised. Stop

the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer-

ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-

ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of

132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate along with a dedicated message on the display (if equipped) if an unknown fluid not conforming with acceptable characteristics is inserted, or if an average consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If the problem is not solved, a specific message will appear on the Instrument Cluster Display whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to start the engine.
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a continuous dedicated message will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound (if equipped).
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear

driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part time mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates when front and/or rear axle locker fault has been detected.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133

Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated Ú page 161.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both axles have been locked. The telltale will display the lock icon on the front and rear axles to indicate the current lock status.
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision Warning is off Ú page 313.
Neutral Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the neutral mode Ú page 154.

Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light -- If Equipped

This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service Ú page 177.

Sway Bar Indicator Light -- If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate

when the front sway bar is

disconnected.

Off Road+ Indicator Light -- If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when Off-Road+ has been activated.

Cargo Light On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the Bed Lamp has been activated.
Wait To Start Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position. Its duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed.

134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The "Wait To Start" telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) indicator light illuminates when the AdBlue® (UREA) level is low.
Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of AdBlue® (UREA).
If filling the tank is done with a remaining range of AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you may need to wait two minutes before starting the vehicle.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illuminate when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle

before you drain the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine damage, and please see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If the indicator light is illuminated, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed the system. If the above indications come on immediately after refuelling, water has probably been poured into the tank: switch the engine off immediately and contact an authorized dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is set and there is no vehicle in front detected Ú page 177.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light -- If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a vehicle in front is detected Ú page 177.
4WD Auto Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will provide power to all four wheels and shift the power between the front and rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum traction in dry and slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed Ú page 175.
Front Fog Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on Ú page 49.

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in "Autostop" mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135

Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has been buckled in the second row. A telltale will display in the upper right corner of the instrument cluster display to correspond to the specific seating position once the seat belt has been buckled Ú page 321.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light -- If Equipped With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light -- If Equipped With a Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned on, but not set.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light -- If Equipped With a Base Instrument Cluster

This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned on, but not set.

Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light -- If

Equipped With A Premium Instrument

Cluster

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two wheel drive high mode.

Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster

This light indicates when a rear seat belt has been buckled in the second row. A telltale will display in the upper right corner of the instrument cluster display to correspond to the specific seating position once the seat belt has been buckled.

136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner information.

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been turned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when cruise control has been turned on, but not set.
Selec - Speed Control (SSC) Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec Speed Control is activated. Selec Speed Control is available in 4WD Low ONLY.

BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic

codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system Ú page 223.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137

WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states and/or provinces that

require an Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies

the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

is functioning and is not on when the engine is

running, and that the OBD II system is ready for

testing.

The OBD II system may not be ready if your

vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a

depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the

OBD II system should be determined not ready

for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

139
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE -- GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The "4WD Low Indicator 4
Light" will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

140 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/ STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/ STOP button is pushed once, the

transmission will automatically select PARK and the engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
3. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode.
4. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE: The system will automatically time out and the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions -- With Driver's Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will display "ACC").
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster will display "ON/ RUN").
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster will display "OFF").
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a

back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) "P" is indicated in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed transmission
Driver door is ajar or if the driver door is removed and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE: For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the engine will turn off and the ignition will change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.

STARTING AND OPERATING 141
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed transmission
Driver door is ajar or if the driver door is removed and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
4
Driver door is removed
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less
Driver seat belt is unbuckled
Driver door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message "AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear" will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector must be returned to "P" to select desired gear.

142 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less.
The message "Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P" will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message "AutoPark Disabled" will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Additional customer warnings will be given when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver's door is ajar
The message "AutoPark Not Engaged" will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver's door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELOW 22°F OR -30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and

hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Ú page 372.

STARTING AND OPERATING 143

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE -- DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the wireless ignition node is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: Engine start up in very low ambient temperature
could result in evident white smoke. This condi- 4
tion will disappear as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as 30 seconds. If the engine fails to start during this period, please wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating start procedure.
If the "Water in Fuel Indicator Light" remains on, DO NOT START engine before you drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage Ú page 398.

144 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission gear selector in the PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed in the water jacket of the engine. It requires a 110115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its use is recommended for environments that routinely fall below -10°F (-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not been running overnight or longer periods and should be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is required for cold starts with temperatures under -20°F (-28°C).
NOTE: The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in thermostat.

A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine starting and reduces the amount of white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING
Observe the instrument cluster lights when starting the engine.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NOTE: A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible under very cold conditions. The "Wait to Start" telltale will be illuminated during the pre-heat process. When the engine "Wait To Start" telltale turns off the engine will automatically crank.

CAUTION!
If the "Water in Fuel Indicator Light" remains on, DO NOT START the engine before you drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage Ú page 398.
3. The system will automatically engage the starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP button again.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.

STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating system. If the instructions in this manual are followed, the engine should start in all conditions and no type of starting fluid should be used.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 145

NORMAL OPERATION -- DIESEL ENGINE

Observe the following when the diesel engine is operating:
All message center lights are off.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.

Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.

Voltmeter operation.

The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at

various engine temperatures. This is caused by

the glow plug heating system. The number of

cycles and the length of the cycling operation is

controlled by the engine control module. Glow

plug heater operation can run for several

minutes. Once the heater operation is complete

the voltmeter needle will stabilize.

146 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may require special considerations. The following charts suggest these options: Fuel Operating Range NOTE: Use "Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels (ULSD)" ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart *Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist".

NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Climatized ULSD fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD fuel and Number 1 ULSD fuel which reduces the temperature at which wax crystals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of "Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel". Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and exhaust system damage Ú page 454.
If climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or

equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 458.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.

STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle
period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant 4
to carry excess heat away from the turbocharger.
NOTE: Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.

Driving Condition
Stop and Go Stop and Go Highway Speeds

Load
Empty Medium Medium

Turbocharger Temperature Cool
Warm

Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown None 0.5 1.0

148 STARTING AND OPERATING

Driving Condition
City Traffic Highway Speeds
Uphill Grade

Load
Maximum GCWR Maximum GCWR Maximum GCWR

Turbocharger Temperature Hot

Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown 1.5 2.0 2.5

NOTE: Under certain conditions the engine fan will run after the engine is turned off. These conditions are under high load and high temperature conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS -- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
To reduce the potential for engine and transmission overheating in high ambient temperature conditions, take the following actions:
City Driving -- When stopped, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving -- Reduce your speed.

Up Steep Hills -- Select a lower transmission gear.
Air Conditioning -- Turn it off temporarily.
NOTE: If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C will automatically turn off.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil Pressure
If the low oil pressure warning light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when the light turns on.
NOTE: Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could result in immediate and severe engine damage.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed Parts All engine failures give some warning before the parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the engine requires service. Some important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises

Fuel, oil or coolant leaks Sudden change, outside the normal oper-
ating range, in the engine operating temperature Excessive smoke Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Diesel Engine Block Heater Cord Location

The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled up next to the Power Distribution Center (PDC).
For diesel engines, its use is recommended for environments that routinely fall below -10°F (-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not been running for long periods of time and should be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is required for cold starts with temperatures under -20°F (-28°C).
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution.
NOTE: The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS -- GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 149

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration

within the limits of local traffic laws contributes

to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle

acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and

should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the

factory is a high-quality energy conserving type

lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with

anticipated climate conditions under which

vehicle operations will occur.

For the recommended viscosity and quality grades see Ú page 458.

CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

150 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS -- DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
The diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to its construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE: Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen at this time.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For recommended viscosity and quality grades see Ú page 458. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 151
CAUTION! If the "Brake Warning Light" remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
4 WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION! Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.
(Continued)

152 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) Do not drive with your hand resting on the
gear selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox internal components. NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.
Manual Transmission Shifter To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of the selector).

To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all the way left and then forward.
Shift Pattern
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a standing position.

NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up shift speeds may not apply.

STARTING AND OPERATING 153

Engine 3.6L

Speeds Accel. Cruise

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

1 to 2

2 to 3

3 to 4

15 (24)

24 (39)

50 (80)

10 (16)

19 (31)

40 (64)

4 to 5 65 (104) 55 (88)

5 to 6 70 (112) 65 (105)

NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE: Above certain speeds, downshifts may be blocked and not available.

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal pressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage. (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
When descending a hill, be very careful to 4
downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause engine damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal pressed could result in clutch damage.

154 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION! Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

Gear Selection Maximum Speed

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

6 to 5

5 to 4

4 to 3

3 to 2

80 (129)

70 (113)

50 (81)

30 (48)

2 to 1 15 (24)

NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 155

WARNING! (Continued)
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock system which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.

156 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
EIGHTSPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)

while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster Ú page 160.
Gear Selector NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake
Shift the transmission into PARK
Turn the ignition off
Remove the key fob from the vehicle

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 157

WARNING! (Continued)

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-

erate quickly forward or in reverse. You

could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)

158 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 212.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 379.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position should be used for all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear Ú page 160. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting also known as AutoStick mode. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster Ú page 160.

Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).

STARTING AND OPERATING 159

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns off.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

160 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the

selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.

Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE: When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

FOURWHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
WARNING! Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE -- IF EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector

The transfer case provides four mode positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range -- This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range -- This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

STARTING AND OPERATING 161
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if 4
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
N (Neutral) -- This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
See Recreational Towing for further information Ú page 212.

162 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range -- This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to "Shifting Procedures" in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. The light

will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the

transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired

position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE -- IF EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector The transfer case provides five mode positions: 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range) 4H AUTO (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range) 4H PT (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range) N (Neutral) 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)

STARTING AND OPERATING 163
For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range -- This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range -- This range 4
sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4H PT
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range -- This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

164 STARTING AND OPERATING
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Neutral -- This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Ú page 212.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range -- This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction

and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire

wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to "Shifting Procedures" in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H AUTO Or 4H AUTO To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO To 4H PT Or 4H PT To 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PT can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H PT/4H AUTO To 4L Or 4L To 4H PT/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place

STARTING AND OPERATING 165
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is 4
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

166 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE -- IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND REAR -- IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering column).

Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range).
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle only (the "REAR ONLY" will illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the "FRONT + REAR" will illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock the front axle.

NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range), or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY -- IF EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper conditions are met.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering column).

Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range).
The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active Ú page 168.
Vehicle must be in ESC "Full Off" mode Ú page 304.
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip or tight cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle only ("REAR ONLY" will illuminate).

To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range), Off Road+ is turned off by the driver, ESC "Full Off" is exited, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is fully locked or unlocked.
The rear axle lock system may temporarily disengage the rear locker under some conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically re-lock as soon as the system allows.
If an axle lock request cannot be completed by the system within 5 seconds due to vehicle operating conditions not being correct, the request will be canceled and the driver may need to re-request the locker to be activated.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar.

STARTING AND OPERATING 167 This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations. This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering column).
4
SWAY BAR Switch Push the SWAY BAR switch to disconnect or connect the sway bar. The "Sway Bar Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The "Sway Bar Indicator Light" will flash during activation transition, or when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal driving conditions.

168 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. Under certain circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or solid "Sway Bar Indicator Light." Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to return to off-road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road position Ú page 161. The "Sway Bar Indicator Light" will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch again.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road mode, the "Sway Bar Indicator Light" will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.

OFF ROAD+ -- IF EQUIPPED
Off Road+ Switch When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve the user experience when using specific Off Road driving modes. To activate Off Road+, push the Off Road+ switch in the switch bank. The vehicle's performance will improve depending of which Four Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is activated. NOTE: Off Road+ will not function in Two Wheel Drive High (2H) mode. If the button is pushed while in 2H mode, the cluster display will show the message "Off Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD".

When Off Road+ is active, the following features will activate:
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the Instrument Cluster Display
A mode specific message will display the Instrument Cluster Display
Off Road pages will launch on the radio head-unit (if equipped)
The Off Road Camera will launch (if equipped)
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave in different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use. The following enhancements will occur when using Off Road+.
4L
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and controllability focus, change in shifting schedule when rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to de-gain and low range, operates at lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
Off Road+: Recall the last status between ignition cycles

4H
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand performance/ wheel slip focus, change in shift schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake lock differential with no engine management
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited speed
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will not function while using Off Road+. A dedicated cluster message will display indicating this if either feature is activated while in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+, the following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control will turn off, but Stability Control will remain active.

STARTING AND OPERATING 169

Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction Control and Stability Control will turn off.

ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-

hydraulic power steering system that will

provide increased vehicle response and ease of

maneuverability. If the electro-hydraulic power

steering system experiences a fault that

prevents it from providing power steering assist,

then the system will provide mechanical

steering capability.

CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool.

If the "SERVICE POWER STEERING" message and a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Ú page 115.

170 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the "POWER STEERING HOT" message and an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Ú page 115.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service.

STOP/START SYSTEM -- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
NOTE: It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.

Battery Locations
1 -- Primary Battery 2 -- Secondary Battery
AUTOSTOP MODE
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Both the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section Ú page 115.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display

Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop: Driver's seat belt is not buckled
Driver's door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed
HVAC set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
Engine temperature too high
The transmission is not in a forward gear
Hood is open
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure

STARTING AND OPERATING 171

Accelerator pedal input

Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from previous Autostop

Steering angle beyond threshold

ACC is on and speed is set

Vehicle is at high altitude

System fault present

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven

several times without the Stop/Start system

going into a STOP/START READY state under

more extreme conditions of the items listed

above.

TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP MODE

While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.

172 STARTING AND OPERATING

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode: The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold

TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/ START SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The "Stop/Start OFF" message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section, and the autostop function will be disabled Ú page 115. NOTE: The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.

TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/ START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message will appear in the instrument cluster display Ú page 115.
If the "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
STOP/START SYSTEM -- MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal will automatically restart the vehicle.

NOTE: It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled during off-road use. Secondary Battery Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations 1 -- Primary Battery 2 -- Secondary Battery

AUTOSTOP MODE
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Both the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Ú page 115.

STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and the clutch pedal must be fully released.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear, and
the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air flow will 4
be reduced.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In following situations the engine will not stop:
Driver's seat belt is not buckled
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C)
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode

174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
Battery discharged
When driving in REVERSE
Hood is open
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is open
Vehicle is at high altitude
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Forward Gear is engaged
Steering angle beyond threshold
System fault is present
HVAC set to MAX A/C
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode, the engine will start automatically when:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes
Battery voltage drops too low
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h)
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed

Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral) Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
(ESS Models Only)
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/ START SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The "Stop/Start OFF" message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section, and the Autostop function will be disabled Ú page 115.

NOTE: The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/ START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message will appear in the instrument cluster display Ú page 115.
If the "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining a set distance between you and the vehicle ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE: In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control system takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

STARTING AND OPERATING 175

Cruise Control Buttons

1 -- SET (+)/Accel 2 -- CANC/Cancel 3 -- SET (-)/Decel 4 -- On/Off 5 -- RES/Resume

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

176 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always ensure the system is off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.

WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs

Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF position, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped with ACC Ú page 175.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 177

NOTE:

If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-

tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-

mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and

Forward Collision Warning system.

Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC distance not set) will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode selected.

178 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 -- Distance Increase Button 2 -- Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off 3 -- Distance Decrease Button Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read "ACC SET."
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off

ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the instrument cluster displays "ACC Ready."
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL

STARTING AND OPERATING 179
When the manual transmission is in first gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h) (manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver's door is open at low speeds
When the driver's seat belt is unbuckled at 4
low speeds
When ESC Full Off mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display will read "ACC Ready."
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."

180 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE: Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without an ACC distance set. To change between the different modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (no ACC distance set), the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE: Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed while an ACC distance is also set, the system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated)

The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h) (manual transmission only)
The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than 10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual transmission only)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system: Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if: The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed

The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

STARTING AND OPERATING 181

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if

traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming

a set speed that is too high or too low for

prevailing traffic and road conditions could

cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate

too sharply for safe operation. Failure to

follow these warnings can result in a collision

and death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

182 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: When you override and push the SET (+) or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows a vehicle ahead to a

standstill, your vehicle brakes will release two seconds after coming to a full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.

Distance Settings
1 -- Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) 2 -- Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) 3 -- Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) 4 -- Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the

instrument cluster displays the ACC Set with Target Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages Ú page 179
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE!" will flash in the

instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
NOTE: The "BRAKE!" screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in front, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action if the vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.

STARTING AND OPERATING 183
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop 4
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning will display and a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display the above message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will read "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded performance.

This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.

Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display reads "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. The following are examples of these types of situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.

STARTING AND OPERATING 185 Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
4
Offset Driving Condition Example

186 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. The driver must maintain control of the vehicle, remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if needed.

Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE: The driver must maintain control of the vehicle, remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if needed.

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Ú page 466.

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). For system limitations and usage precautions, see Ú page 192.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 187

ParkSense can be active only when the gear

selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is

enabled at one of these gear selector positions,

the system will remain active until the vehicle

speed is increased to approximately 7 mph

(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the

instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle

is above ParkSense operating speed. The

system will become active again if the vehicle

speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

PARKSENSE SENSORS

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

188 STARTING AND OPERATING
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors/ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if "Sound and Display" is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect system Ú page 224.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display Ú page 115. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/ or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center front region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

1 -- No Tone/Solid Arc 2 -- No Tone/Flashing Arc 3 -- Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 4 -- Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 5 -- Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 189
4
ParkSense Arcs 6 -- Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 7 -- Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 -- Slow Tone/Solid Arc 9 -- Slow Tone/Solid Arc 10 -- Single 1/2 Second Tone/ Solid Arc

190 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance (inches/cm)
Arcs -- Left Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right
Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced

Greater than 79 inches (200 cm) None None None
None
No

79-59 inches (200-150 cm)
None 10th Solid
None Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear center
only)
Yes

WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

59-47 inches (150-120 cm)

47-39 inches (120-100 cm)

39-25 inches (100-65 cm)

None 9th Solid
None

None 8th Solid
None

None 7th Flashing
None

Slow
(for rear center only)

Fast
(for rear center only)

Yes

25-12 inches (65-30 cm) 6th Flashing 6th Flashing 6th Flashing
Fast
Yes

Less than 12 inches (30 cm) 5th Flashing 5th Flashing 5th Flashing
Continuous
Yes

Front Distance (inches/cm) Arcs -- Left Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right

Greater than 47 inches (120 cm) None None None

WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

47-39 inches (120-100 cm)

39-25 inches (100-65 cm)

None

1st Solid

2nd Flashing

None

25-12 inches (65-30 cm) 3rd Flashing 3rd Flashing 3rd Flashing

Less than 12 inches (30 cm)
4th Flashing 4th Flashing 4th Flashing

STARTING AND OPERATING 191

Audible Alert Chime Radio Volume Reduced

None No

WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

None

Fast

Continuous

Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are programmable.
The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect system Ú page 224.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.

ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display Ú page 115 will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the

ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

192 STARTING AND OPERATING
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/ bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn the ParkSense system off, the instrument cluster display will show a vehicle graphic of the ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show the "ParkSense OFF" message. This message will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/ bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/ bumper when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the tailgate, above the vehicle license plate.

STARTING AND OPERATING 193
NOTE: Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview camera function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Go to the Controls screen by pressing the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display, and then press "Backup Camera".
2. Press the "Back up Camera" button to turn 4
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display, there is only one option for manual activation of the Rear View Camera. Press the "More" hard button on the Uconnect system, and then press "Back up Camera".
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into

194 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through the "Back up Camera" button in the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X", the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zone Red Yellow
Green

Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the "magnifying glass" icon in the upper left of the display screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard

view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.

TRAILCAM SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that allows you to you see an on-screen image of the front view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note "Check Entire Surroundings" across the top of the screen.
Front View Camera NOTE: The system will stay active while in 4WD Low. The TrailCam System has programmable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect system Ú page 224.

STARTING AND OPERATING 195

Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below methods:
Press the "FWD Camera" button on the controls screen.

Press the "Forward Facing Camera" button on the apps menu.

Press the "TrailCam" button on the Off Road Pages.

Press the "Off Road+" button when "Auto Launch Off Road+" (if equipped) has been selected under camera settings.

The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the icon on the Backup Camera view. The Backup Camera view can also be activated by pressing the icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera Delay turned off) and TrailCam view is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera Delay turned on) and the TrailCam view is active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the

196 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X", the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable the display of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.

The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the "Clean Camera" soft button located on the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop when the button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a time while holding the button.
The "Clean Camera" system is not available when windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the steering wheel position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE -- GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the left side of the vehicle. To access the fuel filler cap, push on the fuel filler door to unlatch it. To close the fuel filler door, push on it a second time. If the

fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Cap

WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might

STARTING AND OPERATING 197

indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE -- DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)

The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side

of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or

damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the

correct one for this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Door

198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location 1 -- Diesel Fuel Filler 2 -- DEF Filler NOTE: When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full. Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essential see Ú page 398.
BULK FUEL STORAGE -- DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with water will promote the growth of "microbes." These microbes form "slime" that will clog the fuel filtration system and lines. Drain condensation from the supply tank and change the line filter on a regular basis.
NOTE: When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start see Ú page 401.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death.

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the Environmental Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that are harmful to our health and the environment to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two natural components of the air we breathe. You can operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission requirements.

The DEF injection system consists of the following components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF Lines
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the achievement of diesel emissions requirements; while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability, torque and power ratings.
For system messages and warnings see Ú page 115.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear an audible clicking noise from under the vehicle at a stop. This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the DEF

system. This is normal operation and may be audible from the rear of the vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate in this environment.
NOTE: When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster display) will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank Ú page 115.

STARTING AND OPERATING 199

NOTE: Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in your vehicle.

DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE: For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 458.

1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in fuel door).

Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 -- Diesel Fuel Filler 2 -- Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler

200 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill inlet.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to update after adding a gallon or more of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the DEF system, the gauge may not update to the new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately update after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccurate level readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.

Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the indication appears on the instrument panel display Ú page 115 fill the DEF tank with no more than 2 Gallons (8 liters).
If containers which can be screwed to the filler are used, the reservoir is full when the DEF level in the container stops pouring out. Do not proceed further.

CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do not "top off" the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in temperatures below the DEF freezing point, however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with water and use an absorbent material to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can result in severe damage to your engine, including but not limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other petroleum-based product. Even a very small amount of these, less than 100 parts per million or less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contaminate the entire DEF system and will require replacement. If owners use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either be new or one that is has only been used for adding DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any of the following happen: DEF stops flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.

VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR on front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR 4
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined

separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you

can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 201.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 2,000 lb (907 kg) or more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 201.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) -- If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying 4
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

204 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment 1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer). 2. Measure the height of the top of the front
fender to ground, this is height H1.
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturer's recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately H1 (H2=H1).
6. The truck can now be driven.

STARTING AND OPERATING 205
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class

Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty

2,000 lb (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty Class III - Heavy Duty

3,500 lb (1,587 kg)

6,000 lb (2,722 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty

10,000 lb (4,535 kg)

Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain in this section.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

Model
Sport - Manual Transmission Sport - Automatic Transmission

GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
9,650 lb (4,377 kg)

Frontal Area 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2)

Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg)

Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
400 lb (181 kg)
450 lb (204 kg)

206 STARTING AND OPERATING

Model

GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)

Diesel Sport - Automatic Transmission

12,100 lb (5,488 kg)

Sport - Automatic Transmission (Tow Package)

11,100 lb (5,035 kg)

Diesel Sport - Automatic Transmission (Tow Package)

12,100 lb (5,488 kg)

Sport - Automatic Transmission (Max Tow
Package)

12,800 lb (5,806 kg)

Sport S - Manual Transmission

9,100 lb (4,128 kg)

Sport S - Automatic Transmission

9,650 lb (4,377 kg)

Diesel Sport S - Automatic Transmission

12,100 lb (5,488 kg)

Sport S - Automatic Transmission (Tow Package)

11,100 lb (5,035 kg)

Diesel Sport S - Automatic Transmission (Tow Package)

12,100 lb (5,488 kg)

Sport S - Automatic Transmission (Max Tow
Package)

12,800 lb (5,806 kg)

Frontal Area 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2)

Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg)
6,000 lb (2,722kg)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg)

Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
650 lb (295 kg)
600 lb (272 kg)
650 lb (295 kg)

7,650 lb (3,470 kg)

765 lb (347 kg)

4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 6,500 lb (2,948 kg)

400 lb (181 kg) 450 lb (204 kg) 650 lb (295 kg) 600 lb (272 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)

7,650 lb (3,470 kg)

765 lb (347 kg)

Model

GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)

Overland - Manual Transmission

9,100 lb (4,128 kg)

Overland - Automatic Transmission

9,650 lb (4,377 kg)

Diesel Overland - Automatic Transmission

12,100 lb (5,488 kg)

Overland - Automatic Transmission (Tow Package)

11,100 lb (5,035 kg)

Diesel Overland - Automatic Transmission (Tow Package)

12,100 lb (5,488 kg)

Mojave - Manual Transmission

9,900 lb (4,491 kg)

Mojave - Automatic Transmission

11,450 lb (5,194 kg)

Rubicon - Manual Transmission

10,000 lb (4,536 kg)

Frontal Area 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 40 ft2 (3.72 m2)

STARTING AND OPERATING 207

Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg)

Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
400 lb (181 kg)

4,500 lb (2,041 kg)

450 lb (204 kg)

6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)

650 lb (295 kg)
4
600 lb (272 kg)

6,500 lb (2,948 kg)

650 lb (295 kg)

4,500 lb (2,041 kg)

450 lb (204 kg)

6,000 lb (2,722 kg)

600 lb (272 kg)

4,500 lb (2,041 kg)

450 lb (204 kg)

208 STARTING AND OPERATING

Model

GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)

Diesel Rubicon - Automatic Transmission

11,800 lb (5,352 kg)

Rubicon - Automatic Transmission

12,450 lb (5,647 kg)

Frontal Area 55 ft2 (5.11 m2) 55 ft2 (5.11 m2)

Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
7,000 lb (3,175 kg)

Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
600 lb (272 kg)
700 lb (317 kg)

NOTE:
When using a fascia/bumper mounted ball on any model, the trailer weight is limited to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg), 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) frontal area, and 350 lb (159 kg) tongue weight.
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 426.

TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Weight Distribution

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle
The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire And Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

STARTING AND OPERATING 209
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and 4
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements -- Tires Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 426.

210 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
NOTE: This vehicle has an aftermarket brake controller connector under the dash to the left of the brake pedal. This will be a four pin connector and will be gray in color.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle's wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle's electrical connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.

Four-Pin Connector 1 -- Ground 2 -- Park 3 -- Left Stop/Turn 4 -- Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector

1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes 5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission -- If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve

STARTING AND OPERATING 211

performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

AutoStick -- If Equipped

When using the AutoStick shift control, select

the highest gear that allows for adequate

performance and avoids frequent down-

shifts. For example, choose "5" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "4" or "3"

if needed to maintain the desired speed.

To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

Cruise Control -- If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

212 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE

Towing Condition

Wheels OFF the Ground

Four-Wheel Drive Models See Instructions Automatic transmission in PARK.

Flat Tow

NONE

Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).

Transfer case in (N) Neutral.

Tow in forward direction.

Dolly Tow

Front Rear

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer

ALL

NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

RECREATIONAL TOWING -- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral), automatic transmission must be in PARK, and manual transmission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing. (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting Into (N) Neutral" to be certain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral. Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

STARTING AND OPERATING 213

Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you

leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer

case in the (N) Neutral position without first

fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position disengages both the

front and rear driveshafts from the power-

train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if

the automatic transmission is in PARK (or

manual transmission is in gear). The parking

brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

214 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into DRIVE or REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.

12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of N (Neutral), the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.

DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal -- If Equipped NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed to prevent damage. 1. There are two nuts connecting to the body
side and one bolt connecting to the underbody on each attachment bracket. There are four attachment brackets on each side step.
Fastener Locations (One Side)

STARTING AND OPERATING 215 2. Remove two nuts and one bolt from the
underside of the vehicle for each of the four brackets. Repeat for other side of vehicle.
4
Underside Nuts 3. After all bolts and nuts have been removed,
pull the side step assembly off of the vehicle. 4. To reinstall the side steps align the studs to the body side holes and fasten all nuts on all four brackets. Then secure all four bolts to the underbody. Repeat the reassembly procedure for the other side.

216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Bumper End Cap Removal -- If Equipped The end caps on your vehicle's front bumper can be removed by following the steps below: NOTE: Bumper end caps are removable on steel bumper only. 1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR
bracket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not remove the bolts.
Bolt #1

Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a

good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over.
NOTE: It is recommended that the Stop/Start System be disabled during off-road use.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.

When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L range.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a quarter turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try

STARTING AND OPERATING 217

turning your steering wheel no more than a

quarter turn quickly back and forth for

additional traction. Mud holes pose an

increased threat of vehicle damage and getting

stuck. They are normally full of debris from

previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good

practice before entering any mud hole, get out

and determine how deep it is, if there are any

hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be

safely recovered if stuck.

Sand

Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other

218 STARTING AND OPERATING
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.

WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.

CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high-centered.
Getting High-Centered If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are

STARTING AND OPERATING 219

in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,

branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.

Driving Up Hill

Once you have determined your ability to

proceed and have shifted into the appropriate

gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest

possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant

throttle and apply more power as you start up

the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;

the abrupt change of grade could cause you to

lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,

ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires

back on the ground. As you approach the crest

of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly

proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip

as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the

accelerator and maintain headway by turning

the steering wheel no more than a quarter turn

quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh

"bite" into the surface and will usually provide

enough traction to complete the climb. If you do

not make it to the top, place the vehicle in

220 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed.
Driving Across An Incline If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.

Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner. You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when

crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed (3 to 5 mph {5 to 8 km/h} maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle components, and your brakes will be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross.

STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and 4
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out

222 STARTING AND OPERATING
from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check

for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, driveline, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

NOTE: Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission bell housing for mud and debris and clean as required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

223
MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

It is not possible to know or to predict all of

the possible outcomes if your vehicle's

systems are breached. It may be possible

that vehicle systems, including safety

related systems, could be impaired or a

loss of vehicle control could occur that may

result in an accident involving serious injury

or death.

ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.

As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer immediately.

224 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to "Data Collection & Privacy" in your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement or "Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity" Ú page 137.

UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings. Push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
1 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display, and the Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features.

MULTIMEDIA 225

NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle's options, feature settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

When making a selection, only press one button at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired menu, press and release the preferred setting "option" until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,

press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

Language

When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:

Language

Setting Name

Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The

available languages are English, Français, and Español.

Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available settings are:

Display Mode

Setting Name

Description
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The "Auto" setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The "Manual" setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.

226 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness Set Theme Keyboard Touchscreen Beep Control Screen Timeout Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Auto Launch with Off-Road +

Description
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The "+" setting will increase the brightness; the "-" will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The "+" setting will increase the brightness; the "-" will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard, QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY Keyboard.
This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
This setting will display navigation prompts in the instrument cluster display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the instrument cluster display.
This setting will automatically launch the Off-Road Pages depending on the selected option. The options are "Off", "Forward Camera", and "Off Road".

MULTIMEDIA 227
Units When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:

US Metric
Custom

Setting Name

Description

This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.

This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.

The setting changes the "Speed" (MPH or km/h), "Distance" (mi or km),

"Fuel Consumption" (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),

"Pressure" (psi, kPa, or bar), and "Temperature" (°C or °F) units of

measurement independently.

Voice When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's Voice Recognition feature.

Setting Name Voice Response Length
Show Command List

Description
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The "Brief" setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The "Detailed" setting provides the full audio description from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The "Always" setting will always show the command list. The "With Help" setting will show the command list and provide a brief description of what the command does. The "Never" setting will turn the command list off.

228 MULTIMEDIA
Clock When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle's internal clock.

Sync Time With GPS

Setting Name

Set Time And Format/Time Format

Set Time Hours
Set Time Minutes Show Time in Status Bar

Description
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be Off for this setting to be available. The "12 hrs" setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The "24 hrs" setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The "+" setting will increase the hours. The "-" setting will decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The "+" setting will increase the minutes. The "-" setting will decrease the minutes.
This setting will place the time in the radio's status bar.

MULTIMEDIA 229
Camera When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's camera features.

Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Delay Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines Front Camera Gridlines
Auto Launch Off-Road+

Descriptions

This setting will add a timed delay to the Rear Backup Camera when shifting out of reverse.

This setting will turn the Active Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.

This setting will turn the Fixed Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.

This setting will turn the Front Camera Gridlines on or off.

This setting will automatically launch the Off-Road Pages depending on the selected option. The options are "Off", "Forward Camera", and "Off

Road".

Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's safety settings. These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.

Setting Name Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity

Description
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The "Medium" setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The "Near" setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The "Far" setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.

230 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Forward Collision Warning

LaneSense Warning LaneSense Strength ParkSense Front ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Volume
Blind Spot Alert Hill Start Assist

Description
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The "Off" setting will deactivate the FCW system. The "Warning Only" setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The "Warning + Active Braking" setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are "Early", "Medium", and "Late".
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available setting are "Low", "Medium", and "High".
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are "Low", "Medium", and "High".
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are "Low", "Medium", and "High".
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle's blind spot. The "Off" setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The "Lights" setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The "Lights & Chime" setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.

MULTIMEDIA 231

Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines ParkView Backup Camera Delay Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines Front Camera Gridlines
Auto Launch Off-Road+
Tire Fill Assist

Description

This setting will turn the Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.

This setting will add a timed delay to the Rear Backup Camera when shifting out of reverse.

This setting will turn the Active Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.

This setting will turn the Fixed bBackup Camera Guidelines on or off.

This setting will turn the Front Camera Gridlines on or off.

This setting will automatically launch the Off-Road Pages depending on

the selected option. The options are "Off", "Forward Camera", and "Off

Road".

This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.

Mirrors & Wipers When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle's mirrors and wipers.

Headlights With Wipers

Setting Name

Description This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.

232 MULTIMEDIA
Lights When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's exterior and interior lights. NOTE: When the "Daytime Running Lights" feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchased.

Headlight Off Delay

Setting Name

Headlight Illumination On Approach
Headlights with Wipers Daytime Running Lights Flash Lights With Lock Auto Dim High Beams

Description
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are "0 sec", "30 sec", "60 sec", and "90 sec".
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are "0 sec", "30 sec", "60 sec", and "90 sec".
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.

MULTIMEDIA 233
Doors & Locks When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle's doors.

Auto Door Locks Auto Unlock On Exit Flash Lights With Lock

Setting Name

Sound Horn With Lock

Sound Horn With Remote Start Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Passive Entry Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob

Description
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the 5
key fob. The "Off" setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The "1st Press" setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The "2nd Press" setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The "Driver Door" setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The "All Doors" setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter-N-Go) on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.

234 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.

Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start

Description
This setting will activate the vehicle's comfort system and heated seats (if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The "Off" setting will not activate the comfort systems. The "Remote Start" setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The "All Start" setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.

AUX Switches -- If Equipped When the AUX button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches:

AUX 1-4

Setting Name

Description
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There are two types: "Latching" and "Momentary". The power source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the "Battery" or from the "Ignition". In addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to "On" or "Off". Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is set to Ignition.

MULTIMEDIA 235
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.

Easy Exit Seat Engine Off Power Delay

Setting Name

Headlight Off Delay Auto Entry/Exit Suspension

Description
This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are "0 sec", "45 sec", "5 min", and "10 min".
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The "+" will increase the amount 5
of time. The "-" will decrease the amount of time.
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and exit of the vehicle.

Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle's sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.

Balance/Fade Equalizer

Setting Name

Description
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/ back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
This setting will adjust the "Bass", "Mid", and "Treble" ranges of the audio.

236 MULTIMEDIA

Speed Adjusted Volume Surround Sound AUX Volume Offset Auto Play Loudness

Setting Name

Description
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are "Off", "1", "2", and "3".
This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are "+" and "-".
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.

Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.

Setting Name Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Do Not Disturb
Paired Phones Paired Audio Sources Paired Phones And Audio Devices

Description
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the instrument cluster display.
This setting will open the "Do Not Disturb" settings menu. The settings are Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default), and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
This setting will show the list of paired phones.
This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.

MULTIMEDIA 237
SiriusXM® Setup -- If Equipped NOTE: A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional. When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.

Tune Start

Setting Name

Channel Skip

Subscription Information

Selectable Options

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.

This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel

list will display of the skipped channels.

This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.

Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.

Restore Settings Reset App Drawer Clear Personal Data

Setting Name

Description
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

238 MULTIMEDIA
System Information When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.

Software Licenses

Setting Name

Description This will display the software licensing information screen.

UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW

6 -- Compass Button 7 -- Settings Button 8 -- More Button 9 -- Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob 10 -- Screen Off Button

1 -- Radio Button 2 -- Media Button 3 -- Climate Button 4 -- Apps Button 5 -- Controls Button 6 -- Phone Button 7 -- Settings Button

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 -- Radio Button 2 -- Media Button 3 -- Phone Button 4 -- Volume & On/Off Button 5 -- Mute Button

NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

Feature Radio/Media
Phone Settings
Compass More
Controls

MULTIMEDIA 239
Description Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 241. Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system Ú page 255. Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 224. Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off. 5
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE: Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing or being stuck. Press the Compass button to access the vehicle's compass. Press the More button to access additional options. Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and steering wheel.

240 MULTIMEDIA

Feature Apps
Climate

Description
Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions Ú page 54.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop 1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen. 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app
to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Please read this manual carefully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner.

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles.

Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE: Many features of this system are speed dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.

If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions Ú page 466.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system.

MULTIMEDIA 241

Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode:

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the next available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next available station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio presets.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch

242 MULTIMEDIA
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play. Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls

6 -- Station Info 7 -- Seek Up 8 -- Audio Settings

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 -- Preset Radio Stations 2 -- All Preset Radio Stations 3 -- Radio Band (AM/FM) 4 -- Seek Down 5 -- Tune

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 -- Radio Bands 2 -- Preset Radio Stations 3 -- View Next Preset Radio Stations 4 -- Status Bar 5 -- Browse Button 6 -- Seek Down 7 -- Tune Button 8 -- Seek Up 9 -- Audio Settings 10 -- Bottom Bar

The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off control knob clockwise increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the system.

Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down button to tune the radio to the next available
station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next

available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE: Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Seek Down button will scan the different frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info -- If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related to the currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back button on the touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA 243
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press "GO". The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will automatically tune to that station.
Radio Voice Commands Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel 5
and wait for the beep to say a command. See some examples below.
"Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM"
"Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1"
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say "Help". The system provides you with a list of commands.

244 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode -- If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner's Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio service is available throughout their satellite service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change the vehicle's position in order to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in underground parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the Radio does not have the necessary subscription, the Radio is able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/ getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https:// www.siriusxm.ca or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE: You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.

The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/ Weather button, and Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM® Mode.

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 -- Browse 2 -- Radio Bands 3 -- Direct Tune 4 -- Info Button 5 -- Next Button

MULTIMEDIA 245

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio

1 -- Browse 2 -- Replay 3 -- Seek Down Button 4 -- Direct Tune Button 5 -- Seek Up Button 6 -- Audio Settings Button

246 MULTIMEDIA
Replay The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.

Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.

You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.

Play/Pause Rewind Forward Live

Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.

Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.

Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is release.

Live

Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.

Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this information to alert you when either the favorite artist or song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.

Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button 1 -- All Button 2 -- Presets Button 3 -- Favorites Button 4 -- Game Zone Button Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List. This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back arrow.

MULTIMEDIA 247

All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing the All button, the following categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob.

Genre List Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You

can select any desired Genre by pressing the

Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with

the content in the selected Genre.

Presets -- If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.

248 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.

Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel.

Select Team Or Add/Delete -- If Equipped
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from "Alert me to on-air games upon start" or "Alert upon score update" or both when one or more of your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets. This

feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets

The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a preset, press and hold the numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen. Press the All button to view all saved presets. To remove a saved preset, a new preset must be saved over the old one.

MULTIMEDIA 249

Preset Features -- If Equipped

Browse In AM/FM

When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.

Scrolling Preset List

Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can

scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/

Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down

Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.

Preset Selection From List

A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the currently highlighted Preset.

When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the Presets.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets

250 MULTIMEDIA
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 -- Balance/Fade 2 -- Equalizer 3 -- Speed Adjusted Volume 4 -- Surround Sound 5 -- Loudness 6 -- AUX Volume Offset 7 -- Radio Off With Door -- If Equipped

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 -- Balance/Fade 2 -- Equalizer 3 -- Speed Adjusted Volume 4 -- Surround Sound 5 -- Loudness 6 -- AUX Volume Offset 7 -- Radio Off With Door

Audio Setting Balance/Fade
Equalizer
Speed Adjusted Volume Surround Sound -- If Equipped
Loudness -- If Equipped AUX Volume Offset
Auto Play -- If Equipped Radio Off With Door -- If Equipped

MULTIMEDIA 251

Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.

Press the + or buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.

The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from "Off", "1", "2",

and "3". This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with

variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed

increases to compensate for normal road noise.

When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.

When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.

The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.

The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to one of the vehicle's Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press "Off" to turn the setting off.

The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.

252 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode 1 -- Seek Down 2 -- Seek Up 3 -- Browse 4 -- Source 5 -- Pause/Play 6 -- Info 7 -- More Options Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
1 -- Repeat 2 -- Select Source 3 -- Track Time 4 -- Shuffle 5 -- Info 6 -- Bluetooth® 7 -- Tracks
Audio Source Selection Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media

sources available. When available, you can select the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these options: Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button on the touchscreen for artist information on the current song playing. For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Mode is entered by pushing the Media button located on the faceplate. Types of Media Modes
USB Mode Overview USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB device into the USB port, or by selecting the USB button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the

Source Select/Select Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped) or by pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert a USB device with the ignition ON/RUN, the unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the Media button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button Ú page 255.

To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source AUX Mode Overview Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source Select button (if equipped) or pushing the Media button on the faceplate and then selecting the Source button and then the AUX button.

MULTIMEDIA 253
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of 5
the attached device.
NOTE: The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or to return

254 MULTIMEDIA
to the beginning of the previous selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side of the browse window displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device. If supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of the browse window shows items and its sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can also be used to scroll.

On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a desired track on the device. Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long

as the repeat function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio button Ú page 242.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the Info or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to

highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below the track name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
"Change source to Bluetooth®"
"Change source to AUX"
"Change source to USB"

"Play artist Beethoven"; "Play album Greatest Hits"; "Play song Moonlight Sonata"; "Play genre Classical"
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice ("Call John Smith Mobile" or "Dial 248-555-1212").
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of 18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers ("Redial").

MULTIMEDIA 255

Calling Back the last incoming call number ("Call Back").

Viewing call logs on screen ("Show Incoming Calls," "Show Outgoing Calls," "Show Missed Calls," or "Show Recent Calls").

Searching Contacts phone number ("Search for John Smith Mobile").

Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.

Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-

books displayed on the touchscreen.

Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.

Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.

Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.

Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly.

NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.

256 MULTIMEDIA
Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call 800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile" mobile phone. Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology -- the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is used to get into the Phone Mode and make calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc. When you push the button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering wheel is only used for "barge in" and when you are already in a call or want to make another call.

The button on your steering wheel is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like "Call John Smith mobile".
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the "Listen" prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Call" and then "John

Smith" and then "mobile", the following compound command can be said: "Call John Smith mobile."
For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command form voice command "Search for John Smith," or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands: "Search Contacts" and when asked, "John Smith." Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out certain non-word utterances and sounds such as "ah" and "eh."

The system handles fill-in words such as "I would like to".
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as "make a phone call" and "to Kelly Smith". For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow-up prompt such as "Who do you want to call?" in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system requires more information from the user, it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a command or say "Help". All Phone sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the Phone button.

MULTIMEDIA 257

Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu.

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone

Use this QR code to access your

digital experience.

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth®enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone's manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information.

258 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display NOTE: You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure. The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.

Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user enters Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previously been paired. If the system has a phone previously paired, even if no phone is currently connected with the system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select "Yes" to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select "Bluetooth®" and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile

phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE: During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If "No" is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select "Uconnect" and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select "Uconnect."
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect.

9. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting "Yes" will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If "No" is selected, simply select "Uconnect" from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE: During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your "messages" and "contacts". Selecting "Ok" or "Allow" will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.

You can also use the following VR command to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
"Show Paired Phones"
NOTE: Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone's Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth® streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display radio Ú page 257.
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to "Bluetooth®".
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to display the Paired Audio Devices screen.

MULTIMEDIA 259

4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear.

5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.

6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process

screen while the system is connecting.

7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting "Yes" will make this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range.

NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.

260 MULTIMEDIA
You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices:
"Show Paired Phones"
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press "Connect Phone".
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 1 -- Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone 2 -- Make Favorite 3 -- Delete Device/Phone

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

1 -- Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone 2 -- Make Favorite 3 -- Delete Device/Phone
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different phone or audio device than the currently connected device or press the preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option's pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources screen, press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a

different phone or audio device than the currently connected device or press the preferred "Connected Phone" from the list.
2. The option's pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone) -- If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the ability to download contact names and number entries from the mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect system to access your messages and contacts. Selecting "Ok" or "Allow" will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.

To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, follow the procedure in the "Voice Command" in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.

MULTIMEDIA 261
Managing Your Favorites -- If Equipped There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select "Contacts" from the Phone main screen, and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the 5
selected number to display the option's pop-up. In the pop-up, select "Add to Favorites".
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite -- If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select "Favorites" from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the contact you want to remove from your favorites. This will bring up the options for that Favorite contact.

262 MULTIMEDIA
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook

Recent Call Log SMS Message Viewer Call Controls The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 1 -- Answer 2 -- Mute/Unmute 3 -- Ignore 4 -- Transfer

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 -- Answer 2 -- End 3 -- Mute/Unmute 4 -- Transfer 5 -- Join Calls
Other phone call features include: End Call Hold/Unhold/Resume Swap two active calls

Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter the number and press "Dial/Call".
Recent Calls -- If Equipped You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the following call types: All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls button on the phone main screen. You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel and perform the above operation. For example, say "Show my incoming calls".

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call -- No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen. You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 1 -- Answer Button 2 -- Caller ID Box

MULTIMEDIA 263

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

1 -- Answer Button

2 -- Caller ID Box

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call -- Call Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

264 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
"I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly".
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.

Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the "Listening" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial."
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF.

NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period

MULTIMEDIA 265
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
WARNING! ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the 5 wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.

266 MULTIMEDIA
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero). Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under: Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a command. See some examples below:
"Call John Smith"
"Dial 123 456 7890"
"Redial" (call previous outgoing phone number)
"Call back" (call previously answered incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call", then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work".

Voice Text Reply -- If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. "Listen" to have the system read an incoming text message. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. "Reply" after an incoming text message has been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the predefined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes.

Stuck in traffic.

See you later.

No.

Start without me.

I'll be late.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Okay. Call me.

Where are you?
Are you there yet?

I will be 5 <or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60> minutes
late.

I'll call you later.
I'm on my way.
I'm lost.

I need directions.
Can't talk right now.

See you in 5 <or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
Thanks.

NOTE: Only use the numbering listed in the provided table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. For further information on how to enable this feature on

your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone's® "User Manual".
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free -- If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages, and many other useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the

MULTIMEDIA 267

connection can generally be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.

Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system Ú page 466.

ANDROID AUTOTM & APPLE CARPLAY® -- IF

EQUIPPED

ANDROID AUTOTM
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
Android AutoTM is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your AndroidTM 5.0 or higher powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android AutoTM brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android AutoTM can be used with speech technology, the

268 MULTIMEDIA
steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display's touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android AutoTM, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android AutoTM features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android AutoTM app from the Google Play store on your AndroidTM-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your AndroidTM-powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android AutoTM app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your device in the app begins to download. Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use the app.
NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

Android AutoTM And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE: To use Android AutoTM, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android AutoTM may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Android AutoTM icon.
NOTE: Android AutoTM is set to launch immediately once a compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by pressing the Android AutoTM icon on the touchscreen.

Once Android AutoTM is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone's data plan:
Google MapsTM for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communication
Various compatible apps
Maps Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Android AutoTM to access other navigation apps.
While using Android AutoTM, Google MapsTM provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance

For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https:// www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https:// support.google.com/android or https:// support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android AutoTM allows you to access, stream, and play your favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio playable application. Using your smartphone's data plan, you can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE: Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using Android AutoTM for them to work with Android AutoTM.
NOTE: To see the track details for the music playing through Android AutoTM, select the Uconnect system's media screen.
For further information, refer to https:// support.google.com/androidauto.

Communication
With Android AutoTM connected, push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to Android AutoTM. This allows you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android AutoTM App displays all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android AutoTM, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with Android AutoTM.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android AutoTM.
Android AutoTM Voice Command
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android AutoTM features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

MULTIMEDIA 269

Android AutoTM allows you to use your voice to

interact with Android'sTM best-in-class speech

technology through your vehicle's voice

recognition system, and use your smartphone's

data plan to project your AndroidTM-powered

smartphone and a number of its apps onto your

Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your AndroidTM

5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,

using the factory-provided USB cable, and press

the new Android AutoTM icon that replaces your

"Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin

Android AutoTM. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the

"Microphone" icon within Android AutoTM, to

activate Android'sTM VR, which recognizes

natural voice commands, to use a list of your

smartphone's features:

Maps

Music

Phone

Text Messages

Additional Apps

270 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running AndroidTM 5.0 or higher and download app on Google Play. AndroidTM, Android AutoTM, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE: Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.

Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
1 -- LTE Data Coverage 2 -- Apple CarPlay®
NOTE: To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.

Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhone's® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE: Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.

Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or any third party application installed on your device. Using your iPhone's® data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able to read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.

MULTIMEDIA 271

Apps

The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are available to use, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.

Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/

carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of

available apps for Apple CarPlay®.

Apple CarPlay® Voice Command

NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your

272 MULTIMEDIA
"Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone's® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps -- If Equipped
Additional Apps -- If Equipped
NOTE: Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTOTM AND APPLE CARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android AutoTM And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android AutoTM or Apple CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the

Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE: Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android AutoTM uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to function. The connected device is unavailable to other devices when connected using Android AutoTM or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System -- If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android AutoTM/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text messages. However, another device can also be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE: Apple CarPlay® and Android AutoTM can only be launched from the front and center console USB ports only.

CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES -- IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons Ú page 360.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle's Uconnect system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM GuardianTM connected vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM GuardianTM in your vehicle, you first need to activate SiriusXM GuardianTM services.

WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE: SiriusXM GuardianTM involves the collection, transmission and use of data from your vehicle Ú page 297.
SiriusXM GuardianTM Contact Information And Business Hours
SiriusXM GuardianTM/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/ sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/ sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091

Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call: 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Business Hours
Central Time
Monday through Friday 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
Saturday 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
What Is SiriusXM GuardianTM?
SiriusXM GuardianTM uses an embedded device in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care center via wireless and landline communications networks. Depending on the type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM GuardianTM services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your device. SiriusXM GuardianTM is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.

MULTIMEDIA 273
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or reach emergency support.
Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
5
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM GuardianTM that may limit or prevent service delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical system or other important parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third parties or the government, Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM GuardianTM features are available for all models.

274 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM GuardianTM provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your computer.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App. Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map and send your locations directly to your Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM GuardianTM services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you directly to SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care for assistance in an emergency.

Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM GuardianTM in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM GuardianTM services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select "Customer Care" to speak with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select "Enter Email" to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address to activate services in your vehicle.

The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of SiriusXM GuardianTM services from your date of purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to continue your services by calling a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you're only a few steps away from using connected services.

Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the SiriusXM GuardianTM services starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM GuardianTM is required.

Uconnect Mobile App
1 -- Settings 2 -- Vehicle Info 3 -- Location And Send & Go 4 -- Remote Commands

Download the Uconnect app to your mobile device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/ Register button in the upper right-hand corner to register your account online. a. Click the Register button b. Select the correct country and email address then click "Register". c. You will then receive an email notification to confirm/verify your newly created account.

MULTIMEDIA 275
d. After clicking the email link, it will take you to a website and prompt you to assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the website will direct you to your homepage where you can add in your vehicle's VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your account via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from 5
the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press "OK". A confirmation email will be sent to the provided email address.
d. Press "Continue Activation" from the confirmation email. It may take a short time before remote services will be available, but you will be able to log into the Uconnect App and the owner's site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.

276 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner's Site
Your Owner's Site website https:// www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you with all the information you need, all in one place. You can track your service history, find recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos about your vehicle's features, and easily access your manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM GuardianTM account. This section will familiarize you with the key elements of the website that will help you get the most of your SiriusXM GuardianTM system.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign In/Register button and enter your email address and password.

For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button. Select from "Dashboard", "Vehicle Health Report", and "Recalls". The website will then prompt you to log in using your email address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM GuardianTM account, such as your contact information, password and SiriusXM GuardianTM PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM GuardianTM-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription, press one of these icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.

Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM GuardianTM account. For example, any time you use your remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner's Account at https:// www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and select "Dashboard", or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents), select "My Vehicle" and then "Dashboard".
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select "SiriusXM GuardianTM" where you can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address to notify you, and you can customize the types of messages.

USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM
SOS Call
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM GuardianTM services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without a network connection compatible with your device.

Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button

Center Light Status Off
Green Red

Description No call activated Active call in progress
System error

SiriusXM GuardianTM In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With SiriusXM GuardianTM, your vehicle has onboard assistance features located on the rearview mirror or overhead console designed to enhance your driving experience if you should ever need assistance or support.

Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent in the event of an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit location information. In the event of a minor collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS button to be connected to a call center agent who can send emergency assistance to your vehicle's location.
NOTE: Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn green indicating a call has been placed.

MULTIMEDIA 277

NOTE:

In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed, there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is placed. The system will verbally alert you that a call is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button on the rearview mirror or press the Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10 seconds.

During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired phone is disconnected so

incoming or outgoing calls will go through

your mobile device versus the hands-free

system which is not available due to the

SOS Call.

2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent is made, the agent will stay on the line with you.

278 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care center may be recorded or monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM GuardianTM services, you consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services. In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased outside the United States and Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM GuardianTM services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
An in-vehicle audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason (including during or after an accident) the SOS Call system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.

Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM GuardianTM system. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly functioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. (Continued)

MULTIMEDIA 279

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal to the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regular inspection of your vehicle may result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely from your mobile device. These features include locking/unlocking,
remote starting, and activating the horn and 5
lights of the vehicle.

280 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands 1 -- Lock Press Press this button to lock your vehicle. 2 -- Vehicle Start Press this button to start your vehicle.

3 -- Horn & Lights Press this button to sound the horn and activate your lights. 4 -- Unlock Press this button to unlock your vehicle. 5 -- Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to cancel remote start.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Uconnect App
From your computer on the Owner's Site (not available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care (not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM

system). Enter the SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner's Site
1. Log on to your Owner's Site using the username and password you used when activating your SiriusXM GuardianTM services in your vehicle.
NOTE: If you forgot your username or password, links are provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your Owner's Site, select the vehicle you want to send the command to by clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands. Press the desired icon to activate that feature.

4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Please enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care (for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking for your four-digit SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote command.
NOTE: Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN appropriately.

Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM GuardianTM system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using the Uconnect App to command your vehicle, your device must be compatible and be connected to an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.

MULTIMEDIA 281

An ignition cycle is required for some remote commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights activation.

Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is on or during an emergency call.

NOTE:

All other remote services should be performed

via your Owner's Site or through the Uconnect App on your compatible device.

Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off automatically.

282 MULTIMEDIA
This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system. You can set up push notifications every time a command is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start. Working Vehicle Conditions The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle's security system has been armed and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle's check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle's hazard lights must be off.

If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must be started at least once after alarming the system.
NOTE: The SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agents are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.

Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE: The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings when using this feature. You are responsible for compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Roadside Assistance Call
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM GuardianTM system feature will contain an ASSIST button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM GuardianTM services have been activated, the ASSIST button can connect you directly to customer care call centers. You will be directed to one of these four services.

Roadside Assist -- If you get a flat tire or need a tow, you'll be connected to someone who can help anytime.
Connected Services -- Contact the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care call center to activate your services, renew after your trial has expired, and for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM GuardianTM system or help answering any general questions surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care -- In-vehicle support for all non-connected Uconnect system features, such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care -- Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM GuardianTM In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With SiriusXM GuardianTM, your vehicle has onboard assistance features located on the rearview mirror or overhead console designed to enhance your driving experience if you should ever need assistance or support.

How It Works
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will be presented with your ASSIST options on the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM GuardianTM system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly functioning electrical system.

MULTIMEDIA 283
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM GuardianTM services to you, we may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM GuardianTM services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share 5
information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App allows you to search for a destination on your mobile device, and then send the route to your vehicle's navigation system.

284 MULTIMEDIA Send & Go

Send & Go Input

How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the destination. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After selecting the "Location" tab at the bottom of the App, press the search box to browse through one of the categories provided, or type the name or keyword in the search box at the top of the App. You can also select categories such as Favorites or Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears. Location information will then be displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the address by selecting "Send to Vehicle" from the mobile app.

3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on the pop-up that appears on the radio touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or Uconnect 4C NAV unit.

MULTIMEDIA 285 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
5

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
1 -- Activate Services (Connected Services) 2 -- Navigation Button

LTE Network Connection
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.

286 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Finder Description The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App allows you to find the location of your stationary vehicle. You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make finding your vehicle even easier. How It Works Use the Uconnect App to find the location of your vehicle.
1. Select the "Location" tab at the bottom of the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the information by pressing the layers button. These options will appear:
Vehicle Finder Layers 1 -- Map View 2 -- Satellite View 3 -- Hybrid View 4 -- Show Traffic 5 -- View Boundaries

3. You can also select the Person icon to see your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote services that sound horn and flash lights in accordance with the laws, rules and ordinances in effect at the location of your vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent on a properly installed and operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect system.

Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot -- If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made your purchase, turn on your device's Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device -- such as a laptop or any other portable-enabled media -- can connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your private network access the Web -- great for working and relaxing.

WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the vehicle passengers with an internet access hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be activated any time within the first year of new vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle's touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the

MULTIMEDIA 287
How To Purchase button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner's Site and click the link to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing 5
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also view the connected devices from the app screen by pressing the View Connected Devices button.
NOTE: A SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription is not required in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.

288 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications in this vehicle when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an accident involving in serious injury or death.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcement as soon as possible. They will work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care that your vehicle has been stolen.

The SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded the Uconnect App, you can push the "Settings" menu button on your device, select "Help", and then select "SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care" to make the call.
3. SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care will authenticate that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care will work with your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you should also contact your insurance company to inform it of the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect system.

Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE: Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service through which a summary of the performance of your vehicle's key systems will be sent to you every month so you can stay on top of your vehicle's maintenance needs. This is provided as a convenience to you and does not substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM GuardianTM and to FCA, such as your vehicle's health and performance, your

vehicle's location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when you enroll in SiriusXM GuardianTM and will continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription unless you call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more information, located at https:// www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/ privacy.html (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM GuardianTM private policy, see https:// www.siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy/.
Vehicle Health Alert
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem with one of your vehicle's key systems. For further information, go to your Owner's website.
NOTE: Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and activate services. During this

process you will be asked to provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications -- If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when services are needed, or to alert you of other important information, such as recall notices. When you receive a notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent.
NOTE: Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill -- If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and remotely access key services and features.

MULTIMEDIA 289

If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa.

If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help, or complete a list of commands by saying: "Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car."

Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa:

"Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my

<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX."

"Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my

<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX."

"Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>."

"Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my <vehicle name>."

An active subscription to SiriusXM GuardianTM is required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM GuardianTM Ú page 274.

290 MULTIMEDIA
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile device (Apple® or AndroidTM).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will be the same user name and password you used when registering for SiriusXM GuardianTM Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on Alexa! Google Assistant -- If Equipped With the Google Assistant, you can get help and keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available

across your devices, including AndroidTM phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google for help, or for a complete list of commands by saying: "Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help with my car."
Here are a few examples of commands:
"Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX."
"Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX."
"Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>."
"Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my <vehicle name>."
To link your Uconnect account with Google Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant app on your smart phone from the App Store® or Google Play.

2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by pressing the icon in the upper right-hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect account. Press "Link Uconnect to Google".
5. Press "Sign In" and enter the email address and password you created when you activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press "Authorize" to complete the linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote start
Send a destination to their vehicle's built-in Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel level and oil life
And more!

Family Drive Alerts -- If Equipped Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road. You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle's location any time, any place. Use the Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone.

SmartWatch Integration -- If Equipped Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app right on your Apple® Watch or AndroidTM Wear. To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the username and password you created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock button in the app and entering your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and more.

MULTIMEDIA 291
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel for SmartWatch Integration.
Uconnect Market
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless and secure transactions from the comfort of your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations, place food orders, or pay for other goods and services right from the vehicle's touchscreen.
To get started with Uconnect Market on the touchscreen:
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect 5
App drawer.
2. Press "Get Started".
3. Press "Text Me A Link" and enter your phone number to receive a text message with instructions on how to set up Uconnect Market.
NOTE: If the text message does not come through, press the Resend Text button. It might take a minute to receive the text message.

292 MULTIMEDIA
4. Once you receive the text message, press the link provided. You will be directed to a sign-in screen. Enter your email and password. You will then be able to use Uconnect Market.
5. If you do not have an account, press "Register Now" to create one.
6. Accept the Uconnect Market Terms of Service.
7. Enter your credit card information, and press "Next".
8. Enter your phone number, and press "Next".
9. The system will verify the phone number. Once verified, Uconnect Market will be available to use. Press the OK button.
From the online portal, https:// market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty accounts and start receiving benefits from them while still using Uconnect Market and view your purchase history.

MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM ACCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM GuardianTM account, press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care.
NOTE: It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM GuardianTM Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM GuardianTM, active subscribers can push the ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM GuardianTM Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM GuardianTM. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM GuardianTM agent or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you do not have an active subscription, push the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call button on the mirror? You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call

button to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle information, such as make and model, is transmitted along with the last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door? Depending on various conditions, it can take up to three minutes or more for the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more quickly, however its range is limited and your Uconnect App comes in handy for these and other situations.

3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why security measures have been engineered into the Uconnect App. Asking for your username, password and SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN are required for the activation of Remote services through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to protect your passwords and PINs.
4. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is compatible with most devices with the Apple® and AndroidTM operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The Uconnect App relies on a mobile network connection from your device to send commands to your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If either your device or your vehicle is in an area with below average coverage, it may take longer to log in and send commands.

CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE FAQS
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM GuardianTM, does it cover towing or other expenses incurred by using roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO FAQS
1. How long does it take to send the route and destination to my vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message stating that you have a new route will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel the route if selected.

MULTIMEDIA 293
3. Can I select a different route than the most recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message offers a "Locations" option. Once "Locations" is selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER FAQS
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has 5
your PIN and access to your account. It is your responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and SiriusXM GuardianTM terms of service for more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic button.

294 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE ASSISTANCE FAQS
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance your privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to activate this service. You must involve local law enforcement to have SiriusXM GuardianTM locate your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for other law enforcement or government agencies, subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM GuardianTM to do so. We will also provide the service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you provide the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will work together with law enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM GuardianTM lower my insurance rates? Some insurance providers offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto theft. When

shopping for insurance, be sure to inform the insurance provider of your SiriusXM GuardianTM services subscription to find out if the insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.
NOTE: Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and SiriusXM GuardianTM is not an insurance product. You are responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE START FAQS
1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more quickly. However its range is limited. For example, when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you can use the Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get to it.

3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device? People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which is why security measures have been engineered into the Uconnect App. Asking for your username, password and SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN help to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts the engine to warm up or cool down the interior before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the vehicle.
6. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been designed to work on most devices with the Apple® and AndroidTM operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.

CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN & LIGHTS FAQS
1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three minutes.
4. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been designed to work on most devices with the Apple® and AndroidTM operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.

CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM GuardianTM account? There are three ways that you can register your SiriusXM GuardianTM Account:
Push the Assist button. A call will be placed to an agent who can assist in registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu. Select the button to speak with an agent, who can assist in registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen and then follow the prompts from the provided email. You will receive an email with an activation link that will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the activation link, you will be prompted to fill out your information and accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM GuardianTM home page to complete your profile and demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an email address, customers cannot

MULTIMEDIA 295

register for SiriusXM GuardianTM. Customers need to register so they can subscribe to receive additional services and create a SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN for remote command requests.

3. How do I create a SiriusXM GuardianTM

security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM

GuardianTM Security PIN during the

registration process. The SiriusXM

GuardianTM Security PIN will be required to

authenticate you when accessing your

account via SiriusXM GuardianTM Call or

performing any remote services, such as

Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &

Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.

4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM GuardianTM security PIN? If you've already activated services and forgot your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner's Site.

5. How do I update my SiriusXM GuardianTM payment account address? Your SiriusXM GuardianTM Payment Account address can be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care from ASSIST in

296 MULTIMEDIA
your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner's Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM GuardianTM Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM GuardianTM profile? Your name, home address, phone number, email address and SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN can be updated online on your Owner's Site. Log in to your Owner's Site then select Edit Profile to edit your personal information. Make your edits and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them? Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an included trial period for certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while driving? No, some applications and services are not available while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription comes up for renewal? If you have added a credit card to your account information, your subscription will be automatically renewed for a term length in accordance

with the service plan that you have selected at the then current subscription rate and on every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM GuardianTM Care. If you have not added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM GuardianTM will send you an email or letter in advance of your expiration date to remind you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM GuardianTM notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care, or go to your Owner's Site and then update your preferences on the SiriusXM GuardianTM customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card information? Login to your Owner's Site, and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM GuardianTM Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my subscription? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care.

You also can visit your Owner's Site and choose a subscription to view its expiration date. When your subscription is about to expire, you will receive an email or letter of notification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the date of cancellation for annual plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM GuardianTM Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your subscription will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a monthly subscription, your subscription will be canceled on the last day of the month in which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you'll want to remove your account information. This process removes all personal information, returns the Uconnect system to its original factory settings,

removes all SiriusXM GuardianTM services and account information. To remove your account information from the Uconnect system, contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account information before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/ data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not connected to an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if you have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle's health and performance, your vehicle's location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data. The

collection, use and sharing of this information is required to provide the SiriusXM GuardianTM services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at https://www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and diagnostic information including location data may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health information, including location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including SiriusXM GuardianTM is deemed to be your consent to the collection, use and disclosure of this information in accordance with the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your Uconnect services in their

MULTIMEDIA 297
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
"clear" by the repositioning of the antenna, it is 5
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body.

298 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio Ú page 466.
OFF-ROAD PAGES -- IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it will provide you vehicle status while operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the touchscreen, and then select Off-Road Pages.

Main Menu
1 -- Uconnect Apps Button 2 -- Off-Road Pages App
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the three selectable page options. It provides information for the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude

3. Altitude of the vehicle 4. Status of Selec-Speed Control and Selected
Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD 1 -- Transfer Case Status 2 -- Off-Road+ Status 3 -- Latitude/Longitude 4 -- Altitude

DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the vehicle's drivetrain. The following information is displayed: 1. Steering angle in degrees 2. Status of Transfer Case 3. Status of Front Axles -- If Equipped 4. Status of the Rear Axles -- If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD 1 -- Steering Angle 2 -- Lock Icon 3 -- Sway Bar 4 -- Front Axle Locker Status 5 -- Rear Axle Locker Status

MULTIMEDIA 299
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of the vehicle's Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
5
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD 1 -- Coolant Temperature 2 -- Oil Temperature 3 -- Battery Voltage 4 -- Transmission Temperature 5 -- Oil Pressure

300 MULTIMEDIA
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle's current pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide a visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD 1 -- Current Pitch 2 -- Current Roll

301
SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound, as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal characteristics when the ABS activates:

ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
NOTE: The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can

it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the

vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

302 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction

Control System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Selec-Speed Control (SSC), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by applying the brakes very quickly, creating the most efficient braking assistance possible. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear

axles, by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The ERM system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in "Full Off" mode (if equipped). See Ú page 303 for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer -- when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

SAFETY 303

Understeer -- when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

located in the instrument cluster will start to

flash as soon as the ESC system becomes

active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction

Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to

flash during acceleration, ease up on the

accelerator and apply as little throttle as

possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

304 SAFETY

WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC On".

WARNING!
When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.
Full Off -- If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the "Full Off" mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the "ESC OFF" message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.

NOTE: System may switch from ESC "Full Off" to "Partial Off" mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC "Full Off".
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will not switch to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will remain in "Full Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by the driver.
WARNING!
In the ESC "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC "Full Off" mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
(Continued)

SAFETY 305

WARNING! (Continued)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light in the instrument

cluster will come on when the ignition

is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It

should go out with the engine running. If the

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

comes on continuously with the engine running,

a malfunction has been detected in the ESC

system. If this light remains on after several

ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven

several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater

than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized

dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

306 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/ RUN position, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors are detached then the driver's seat belt must be buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, see Ú page 224 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Control will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)

SAFETY 307
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC: The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). 6
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met: The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.

308 SAFETY
The transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds: SSC Target Set Speeds 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) -- if equipped

REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling SSC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive mode if active. The differences may be notable to the driver as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application.

The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur: The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
Feedback To The Driver The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has a lamp that offers feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in. The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. These are the normal operating conditions for SSC.

The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited

Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. See Ú page 202 for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced, and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" modes.

SAFETY 309

WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED

The BSM system uses two radar sensors,

located inside the taillights, to detect highway

licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,

motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot

zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

310 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE (R).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)

extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. See Ú page 224 for more information.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the taillights, where the radar sensors are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the taillights where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (brush guards, bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown) The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. See Ú page 313 for further information.
Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

SAFETY 311
Overtaking/Approaching
6
Overtaking/Passing

312 SAFETY The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 466.
Opposing Traffic

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that are available in the Uconnect system.

SAFETY 313

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP mode, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. The RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current operating

mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored

mode will be recalled and used.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED

FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

314 SAFETY
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.

FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,

the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings Ú page 466.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On or Off The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the control settings. See Ú page 224 for further information.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision button once.

NOTE:
When the FCW is "on", this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is "off", this prevents the system from warning the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to "off", "FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to "Only Warning", this prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to "Warning and Braking", this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to "Full On" from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will reset to "Full On" when the vehicle is restarted.

FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect system. See Ú page 224 for further information.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the "Far" setting and the system status is "Only Warning", this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible more distant collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the "Medium" setting and the system status is "Only Warning", this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/ visual warnings.

SAFETY 315

Near

When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the "Near" setting and the system status is "Only Warning", this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible closer collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.

This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

More dynamic or aggressive drivers that

want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.

FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality" or "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.

316 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE: The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is

defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 426 on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.

The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall system performance. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to ensure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA) system.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Ú page 466.

SAFETY 317
System Operation The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
6
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

318 SAFETY
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the instrument cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With a Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning Light to be on, a chime to sound, an "Inflate to XX" message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning Light as long as none of road

tires are below the low pressure warning threshold.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an existing TPMS system fault is set to "active" or if the system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects an increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the parking brake must be applied.

SAFETY 319

NOTE: It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire Fill Alert mode.

The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) sensor may be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or backward.

When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire

pressure display screen will be displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Operation:

The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended pressure.

The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.

The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let out to reach proper inflation level.

320 SAFETY
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then under-inflated and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert -- If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide feedback while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you will be able to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each axle in the Uconnect system application as preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect

system for the front and rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE: The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles with a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor may be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or backward.

Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-inflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is added or removed to reach proper selected pressure level.
TPMS Deactivation -- If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the

"SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

SAFETY 321
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position Ú page 344.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Ú page 344.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided 6
with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will

322 SAFETY
inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, see Ú page 463 for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision

that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch

is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will

turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. (Continued)

SAFETY 323
WARNING! (Continued)
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of 6
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. (Continued)

324 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/ shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

SAFETY 325

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any

slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

326 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To

verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of

SAFETY 327
a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag 6
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

328 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to Ú page 353. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
ALR -- Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Stow Clips Behind Rear Seat
Your vehicle is equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim next to each of the rear seats. This clip is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of the seatback when it is being folded and opened. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not

leave the webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Rear Stow Clip WARNING! Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the rear seat stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occupant and they could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some

SAFETY 329

models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

330 SAFETY
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
See Ú page 126 for more information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.

Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations 1 -- Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 -- Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the

SAFETY 331
severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/ or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch 6
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System ("OCS") in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant's seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose

332 SAFETY
seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable ("PAD") Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE: When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) -- Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant's seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of The Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light an amber light located on the overhead sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger's most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether it should activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright.
Facing forward.
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat back in an upright position.

SAFETY 333
Seated Properly The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or 6
has very light objects in it. The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint. The front passenger seat is occupied by a
child, including a child seated in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat. The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child or small adult. The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

334 SAFETY

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled Unoccupied seat*Buckled
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light objects
Rear-facing child restraint** Child, including a child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat** Small adult
Properly seated adult

Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled Indicator Light ("PAD") Status NOT ILLUMINATED "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" NOT ILLUMINATED

Front Passenger Air Bag Status DEACTIVATED DEACTIVATED DEACTIVATED DEACTIVATED DEACTIVATED DEACTIVATED ACTIVATED

* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.

The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated for most properly seated and restrained children in the passenger seat and for most properly installed child restraint systems. However, under certain conditions, even with a properly installed child restraint system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF."
NOTE: If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the

SAFETY 335

OCS to detect the adult passenger's seated weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step out of the vehicle.

2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat, such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.

3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.

4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat, with the passenger's feet

comfortably on or near the floor, and with

their back against the seatback.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in this seated position for two to three minutes after restarting the vehicle.

336 SAFETY
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult (depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" when an adult is in the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.

Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger's Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger's seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger's decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger's weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.

The front passenger's seatback is not in the full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger's seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 337
Not Seated Properly
6
Not Seated Properly

338 SAFETY
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant's properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.

A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag
Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.

WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

SAFETY 339
Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

340 SAFETY The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners

SAFETY 341
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause 6
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that gener-

342 SAFETY
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System: Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on

the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

SAFETY 343

WARNING! (Continued)

Do not attempt to modify any part of your

air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-

dentally or may not function properly if

modifications are made. Take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer for any air bag

system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be

serviced in any way (including removal or

loosening/tightening of seat attachment

bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized

dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat

accessories may be used. If it is necessary

to modify the air bag system for persons

with disabilities, contact an authorized

dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

344 SAFETY
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

SAFETY 345
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE: For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 18883274236 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child

who have not reached the height or weight limits Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the

of their child restraint

vehicle

Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point

have outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the

rear-facing child restraint

vehicle

Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

346 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.

Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

SAFETY 347
If the answer to any of these questions was "no", then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/ shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt

under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child

properly, which may result in serious injury or

death. A child must always wear both the lap

and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

348 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint

Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An "X" Below

LATCH Lower Anchors Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether

+ Top Tether Anchor

Anchor

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) / ISOFIX Restraint System
LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

SAFETY 349

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per

Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

350 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH

anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH

anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner's

manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?

You can install child restraints with flexible lower

anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages

Yes

are 19.2 inches (488 mm) apart. Do not install child

restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center

position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Never "share" a LATCH anchorage with two or more

child restraints. If the center position does not have

dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a

child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an

outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

The child seat may touch the back of the front

Yes

passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner's

manual for more information.

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Yes

The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint.

Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, adjacent to the anchorage symbols on
the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.

Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

SAFETY 351
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can 6
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions.
Please Ú page 352 for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

352 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. Ú page 353 to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See Ú page 355 for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child

restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.
See the "Automatic Locking Mode" description Ú page 354 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

SAFETY 353
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 6
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

354 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Contact between the front passenger seat and the

Yes

child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Yes

The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/ or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See Ú page 355 for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

SAFETY 355
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See Ú page 348 for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
6

356 SAFETY
The Top Tether anchorages are located behind each rear seating position. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.
2. Release the seat back by pulling the release strap located on the top of the seat back to provide room to reach the tether anchor.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head restraint (if adjustable) to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts.
4. Attach the hook to the wire anchorage on the cab back wall (inside the opening labeled with the tether anchorage symbol.)

5. Push the seat back rearward until the latch engages and no red indicator is showing on the strap.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the

ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Ú page 330.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

SAFETY 357
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
6
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
(Continued)

358 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
ONLY use the driver's side floor mat on the driver's side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully press the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger's side floor mat on the passenger's side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver's side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully press each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/ liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SAFETY 359
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain

carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless

gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in

a closed area, such as a garage, and never

sit in a parked vehicle with the engine

running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the

engine running for more than a short

period, adjust the ventilation system to

force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

360
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.

ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons 1 -- Assist Button 2 -- SOS Button If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and an SOS button.

WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber Ú page 466.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a built-in function. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM GuardianTM service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.

ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you'll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care In-vehicle support for SiriusXM GuardianTM.
Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361

To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the overhead console or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn green once a connection to an SOS operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to an SOS operator:

Indication that the occupant placed an

SOS Call.

The vehicle brand.

The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.

362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle's SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with the vehicle occupants, and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's SOS Call system will attempt to

remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle's operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.

SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following message "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer."
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer."

WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
7 WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

364 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/ data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Automatic SOS -- If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can immediately connect you with help in the event that your vehicle's airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take the vehicle to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a manual transmission into REVERSE.

5. Cycle the ignition to OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the driver's front wheel is being changed, block the passenger's rear wheel.

JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the right rear seat. To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:
1. Fold up the right rear seat.
2. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift the assembly out from under the seat.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 365
Jack And Tool Bag 4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.

Wheel Blocked
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked in position.

Jack And Tools
3. Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools from bag.

7
Jack And Tool Bag

366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising 1 -- Lug Wrench 2 -- Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2 3 -- Long Extension With Spring Clip 3 4 -- Long Extension With Spring Clip 4 NOTE: If the tailgate is lowered, the jack extension with hook can be added to this assembly to enable lowering of the spare tire without having to raise the tailgate.
CAUTION! The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2. (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) When attaching the tool to the winch mech-
anism be sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is positioned correctly over the winch mechanism adjusting nut. Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly
Assembled For Jack Operation 1 -- Lug Wrench 2 -- Long Extension 2 3 -- Long Extension 3 4 -- Long Extension 4 5 -- Short Extension With Hook

WARNING! After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in the original carrier and location. While driving you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting in serious injury.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.
Access Hole Location

2. Insert the extension tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

3. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 367

Winch Mechanism Tube

Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Pulling The Spare Tire Out

5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

6. Pull the retainer through the center of the

wheel.

Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole

Removing The Retainer

368 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission to REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.

Warning Label
CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts (but do not remove) by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 369

Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are critical. See below images for proper jacking locations. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

Front Jack Lifting Point Front Jacking Location

Rear Jack Lifting Point
7
Rear Jacking Location CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

370 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the ground surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice Ú page 451. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing upward and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371

Reinstalling The Retainer
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place.

Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
7

372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag 3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack. 4. Place the jack and tools in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, place the jack and tools under the rear seat.

5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.

JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START

WARNING! (Continued)
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
NOTE: The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.

Supplemental Battery -- If Equipped
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the main battery to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or death could result if you attempt to jump start using the supplemental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. (Continued)

The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post

Positive (+) Battery Post Cover

If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it will be equipped with two batteries

Ú page 170.

See below steps to prepare for jump starting:

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and place the ignition in OFF mode.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical accessories.

374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cable's reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING! Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground. A "ground" is an exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground must be away from the battery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
NOTE: Vehicles with diesel engines will have a cap to remove to begin the refueling process.

Diesel Fuel Cap

NOTE:

In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly

push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup

and re-release the fuel door using the inside

release button. Do not pry on the door.

376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.

Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. See below steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING! Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways -- slow down.
In city traffic -- while stopped, shift transmission into NEUTRAL (N) , but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver's seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377 In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of Park (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release: 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the manual park release cover located in front of the gear selector, to access the release tether strap.
7
Manual Park Release Cover

378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening
in the console base.
Tether Strap 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal. 5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until
the release lever locks into place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out of PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the "locked" position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and to the right, into its original position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console, and reinstall the cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or SECOND (2) gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL(N) for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial OFF" mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 303. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 212.

380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Towing Condition Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed

Wheels OFF The Ground
NONE
Front Rear ALL

4WD MODELS Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 377.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

FOURWHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA LLC US recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (P) (for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions) Ú page 212.

CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS -- IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are mounted in the front and the rear fascia/ bumpers.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow strap

WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Front Tow Hook

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
Rear Tow Hook WARNING! Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with 7
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 342.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 343.

383
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING -- GASOLINE ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the "Change Oil" or "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display, "Oil Change Required" will be displayed and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster display, "Change Oil" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. To reset the system follow the steps described Ú page 116.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8

384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.

Change oil and filter Rotate the tires

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

NOTE: Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect the CV/Universal joints Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary

NOTE: Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385

20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years:

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Inspect front suspension, rear

suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if

necessary.

Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.

Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.

Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.

Inspect transfer case fluid.

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

Replace cabin air filter.

Replace spark plugs 3.6L Engine.1

386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years:

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km), whichever comes first.

Change the manual transmission fluid if

using your vehicle for any of the following:

trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy

loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert

operation or more than 50% of your

driving is at sustained high speeds during

hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

Change transfer case fluid if using your

vehicle for any of the following: police,

taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387

20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years:

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Or Kilometers:

Change front and rear axle fluid if using

your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road

or frequent trailer towing.

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This 8
could cause an accident.

388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING -- DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer, to reset the message Ú page 115.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months, whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the housing when the new filter is installed if the residual oil is not either removed from the housing or enough time has not elapsed to allow the oil to drain back into the engine. When servicing the oil filter on this engine, carefully remove the filter and use a suction gun to remove any residual oil left in the housing or wait about 30 minutes for the oil to drain back into the engine.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights

MAINTENANCE PLAN -- DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter. Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. Drain water from fuel filter assembly. Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake. Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
8 At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change fuel filter.

390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. Inspect transfer case fluid. Additional Maintenance Drain water from fuel filter assembly. Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. Replace engine air cleaner filter. Replace the cabin air filter.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed 20,000 miles (32 000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391

10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Or Kilometers:

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace accessory drive belt(s). Change transfer case fluid.

X X

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE -- B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when using Biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).

The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use of biofuels.
8
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every second oil change. This is especially important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel Ú page 455.

392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE

1 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 2 -- Battery 3 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 4 -- Engine Oil Fill 5 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir

6 -- Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter

3.0L DIESEL ENGINE

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393

1 -- Battery 2 -- Engine Oil Fill 3 -- Coolant Pressure Reservoir 4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

8
6 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter 7 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 8 -- Power Steering Reservoir Cap 9 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Ú page 372.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Both the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Both the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in the system, resulting in damage to essential electrical components.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or

around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the

proper equipment. If you have any doubt

about your ability to perform a service job,

take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection -- Gasoline Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection -- Diesel Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12991, and that are API SN certified and meet the requirements of the manufacturer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can

present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals see Ú page 384 for gas engines or Ú page 389 for diesel engines.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the "Severe Duty Conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement -- Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.

CAUTION!
All air entering the engine intake must be filtered. The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause rapid wear to engine components.
Many aftermarket performance air filter elements do not adequately filter the air entering the engine. Use of such filters can severely damage your engine.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filter varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be used.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 -- Fasteners 2 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filer cover to access the engine air cleaner filter.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing assembly.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is

present before replacing the engine air cleaner

filter.

1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using a suitable tool.

398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement -- Diesel Engine Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 2 -- Fasteners

2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter 1 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 2 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.

1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using a suitable tool.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR FILTER -- DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator housing is located inside the left frame rail in front of the fuel tank. The best access to this water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate container.

If necessary remove the fuel filter protective cover to access the water drain valve.
1 -- Retainers 2 -- Fuel Filter Protective Cover If water is detected in the water separator while the engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard. At this point you should stop the engine and drain the water from the filter housing.

1 -- Water In Fuel Drain Valve
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/ water; allow the accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open until all water and contaminants have been removed. When clear fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it clockwise.
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel filter assembly, the "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will remain illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the water was drained while the engine was running, the "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" may remain on for approximately three minutes.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399

NOTE: Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station, or government agency for advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.

If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have been drained, follow the directions for Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel Ú page 401.
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT -- DIESEL ENGINE

NOTE:

Using a fuel filter that does not meet FCA US LLC

filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reli-

ability.

CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate container. (Continued)

400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION! (Continued) Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel system. 1. Ensure engine is turned off. 2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to access the fuel filter assembly.
1 -- Retainers 2 -- Fuel Filter Protective Cover 3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter
assembly.

4. Open the water drain valve, and let any accumulated water and fuel drain.
5. Close the water drain valve.

1 -- Fuel Filter Cap 2 -- Socket Adapter

Fuel Filter Assembly
1 -- Water Drain Valve
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter housing to prevent contamination from entering fuel system during service.
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the housing using a socket. Rotate counterclockwise for removal.

8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from the cap and dispose of according to your local regulations.
9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap and housing.
CAUTION! Take care when handling the new fuel filter to prevent contamination from entering the fuel system.
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean engine oil.

11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the cap.
12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing with clockwise rotation, use a socket to tighten.
13. After engine start, verify the fuel filter cap does not leak.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL -- DIESEL ENGINE
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death.
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot on brake to put vehicle in RUN position. This will activate the in tank fuel pump for approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this process twice.

3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting procedure Ú page 144.
CAUTION! The starter motor will engage for approximately 30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between cranking intervals.
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all the fuel lines.
WARNING! Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION! Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to separate water from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system corrosion or damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel additives are not necessary for the proper operation of your diesel engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to assist with cold starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION STRATEGY -- MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions standards. To achieve these
emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped 8
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system's catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.

402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine Ú page 115.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and those items that come into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by the name of its active component, UREA--is a key component of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
For further information Ú page 458.

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks, that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib

must be replaced. In addition, have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Conditions that would require replacement: Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body) Rib or belt wear Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs) Belt slips "Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)

Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE: Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by FCA for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located online, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. FCA recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in

the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air

filter removed and the blower operating, the

blower can contact hands and may propel dirt

and debris into your eyes, resulting in per-

sonal injury.

404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and lower the door.

Cabin Air Filter Access Door Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the cabin air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing. Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the right for clearance.

CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure retaining tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position, ensuring you have properly engaged the travel damper.

Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the cabin air filter access door to the HVAC housing.

Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.

Travel Dampener
1 -- Travel Dampener Housing 2 -- Travel Dampener Rod

For the proper maintenance intervals see Ú page 384 for gas engines or Ú page 389 for diesel engines.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors, and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant, directly into the lock cylinder.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering, marks, water lines, or wet spots are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back

against the glass without the wiper blade in

place or the glass may be damaged.

406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Release Tab 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, press the release tab on the wiper blade, and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Arm J Hook 3 -- J Hook Retainer
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm.

3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO see Ú page 356.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and those items that come into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device, may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc- 8
tioning operating conditions.

408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,

the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System -- Drain, Flush, And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).

For the proper maintenance intervals see Ú page 384 for gas engines or Ú page 389 for diesel engines.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 458.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any "globally compatible" coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deionized water, when mixing the water/ engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409

to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer.

Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if

there is any accumulation of foreign material on

the sealing surfaces.

410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance immediately.

Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine in the off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/ coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant only needs to be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from

rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the freezing point of the coolant in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If determined that more engine coolant needs to be added to the radiator, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

Keep the front of the radiator clean. With air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine system performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Fluid Level Check -- Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
For further information Ú page 462.
WARNING!
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid Ú page 462. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411

WARNING! (Continued)

To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can

result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine

parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.

Brake fluid can also damage painted and

vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to

avoid its contact with these surfaces.

Do not allow petroleum based fluid to

contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal

components could be damaged, causing

partial or complete brake failure. This could

result in a collision.

412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected, inspect the fluid level.
Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the axles.
Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid Ú page 462.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position.

1 -- Fill Hole 2 -- Drain Hole

Transfer Case

Drain And Refill For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384.
Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid Ú page 462.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the

fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan Ú page 384.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only FCA recommended manual transmission fluid Ú page 458.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.

Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only FCA specified transmission fluid Ú page 462. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder Ú page 462.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never 8
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)

414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! (Continued)
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive electrical current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for an extended period of time with the engine off, it may result in vehicle battery discharge.

Blade Fuses
1 -- Fuse Element 2 -- Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element 3 -- Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse)
Power Distribution Center (PDC) The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is labeled with each serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.

Power Distribution Center Location Power Distribution Center

Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09
F10
F11 F12 F13 F14
F15
F16 F17 F18 F19

Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green

Micro Fuse
5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red 25 Amp Clear

15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415

Description

Spare*

Starter

Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)

Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM

Security Gateway

Spare*

Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS

Spare*

Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/ Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)

UCI Port (USB & AUX)

HIFI Amplifier

Spare*

Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty Electrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)

Spare*

Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)

Spare*

416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity F20 F21
F22

Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink

F23

F24

F25

F26

40 Amp Green

F27

30 Amp Pink

F28

40 Amp Green

F29

40 Amp Green

F30

F31

F32

F33

Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

Description Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS Spare* Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) Spare* Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW) Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1 Front Wipers Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2 Spare* DIAGNOSTIC PORT Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM) ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)

Cavity
F34
F35 F36 F37 F38 F39
F40
F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 F48 F49 F50

Cartridge Fuse

30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue

Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417

Description

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP

BRAKE VAC PMP*

TRAILER TOW MOD*

TRAILER TOW CONN 7W*

Engine Control Module (ECM)

Spare*

Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR

Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP

Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)

Spare*

Infrared Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS

Spare*

AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW

Spare*

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

HD ACC*

418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity

Cartridge Fuse

F51

F52

F53

F54

F55

F56

F57

F58

F59

F60

F61

F62

F63

F64

F65

50 Amp Red

F66

40 Amp Green

F67

Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow

15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

Description Humidity Light Rain Sensor (HLRS)/Inverter 400W Wake Up/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/Compass Module (CSGM) Cigar Lighter Wireless Speaker* Spare* Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM) or Parktronics Module In-Car Temp Sensor/PTC Heater Coil Feed Frt Drvr Htd Seat Frt Pass Htd Seat Spare* Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL) Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS) Spare* Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Spare* Power Inverter 400W HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT Spare*

Cavity F68 F69 F70 F71 F72 F73 F74 F75 F76 F77 F78 F79
F80
F81 F82 F83 F84 F85 F86 F87

Cartridge Fuse

30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 60 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink

Micro Fuse
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419

Description

Spare*

INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)

Spare*

HD ELEC ACC PKG*

Spare*

ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)

Heated Mirrors

Spare*

SMART BAR CTRL MOD

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Solenoid 1 2 Block

Shift

REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)

FUEL HTR*

GLOW PLUG*

UREA HTR CTRL UNIT*

PM SENSOR*

Spare*

SUPPLY/PURGING PM*

420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity F88
F89
F90 F91 F92 F93 F94 F95 F96 F97 F98 F99 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104
F105
F106

Cartridge Fuse 20 Amp Blue

20 Amp Blue
40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink

50 Amp Red

Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red

Description NOx SENSOR #1/#2* Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/Cruise Control (CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)/Airbag Disable Lamp TRAILER TOW PARK LMP* Horn HD ACCY #2* HD ACCY #1* Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX) Spare* PWR MIRROR SW RADIO/TBM SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD Spare* ESC-ECU & VALVES Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) DUAL USB PORT HD ACCY #3* Spare* Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Electronic Speed Control (ESC)/PUMP MTR

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421

Cavity F107 F108 F109 F110 F111
* If Equipped

Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue

Micro Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow

Description TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT* HD ACCY #4* TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT* Spare* TRAILER TOW BACKUP*

CAUTION! When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
8

422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs NOTE: See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Bulb Name Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp Heater Control Lamps Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger) Soundbar Dome Lamp ** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Bulb Name Headlamps Premium Head Lamps Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps Base (Overland/Rubicon) Turn Lamp Base (Overland/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number 658 194 ** 912

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number H13
LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 7442NALL
LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 7440NA 7443

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Name

Bulb Number

Front Side Marker Lamps